Details | Last modification | View Log | RSS feed
Rev | Author | Line No. | Line |
---|---|---|---|
14 | pmbaty | 1 | /*===-- clang-c/Index.h - Indexing Public C Interface -------------*- C -*-===*\ |
2 | |* *| |
||
3 | |* Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM *| |
||
4 | |* Exceptions. *| |
||
5 | |* See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information. *| |
||
6 | |* SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception *| |
||
7 | |* *| |
||
8 | |*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*| |
||
9 | |* *| |
||
10 | |* This header provides a public interface to a Clang library for extracting *| |
||
11 | |* high-level symbol information from source files without exposing the full *| |
||
12 | |* Clang C++ API. *| |
||
13 | |* *| |
||
14 | \*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*/ |
||
15 | |||
16 | #ifndef LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H |
||
17 | #define LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H |
||
18 | |||
19 | #include "clang-c/BuildSystem.h" |
||
20 | #include "clang-c/CXDiagnostic.h" |
||
21 | #include "clang-c/CXErrorCode.h" |
||
22 | #include "clang-c/CXFile.h" |
||
23 | #include "clang-c/CXSourceLocation.h" |
||
24 | #include "clang-c/CXString.h" |
||
25 | #include "clang-c/ExternC.h" |
||
26 | #include "clang-c/Platform.h" |
||
27 | |||
28 | /** |
||
29 | * The version constants for the libclang API. |
||
30 | * CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR should increase when there are API additions. |
||
31 | * CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is intended for "major" source/ABI breaking changes. |
||
32 | * |
||
33 | * The policy about the libclang API was always to keep it source and ABI |
||
34 | * compatible, thus CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is expected to remain stable. |
||
35 | */ |
||
36 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR 0 |
||
37 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR 63 |
||
38 | |||
39 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor) (((major)*10000) + ((minor)*1)) |
||
40 | |||
41 | #define CINDEX_VERSION \ |
||
42 | CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE(CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR) |
||
43 | |||
44 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor) #major "." #minor |
||
45 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE(major, minor) \ |
||
46 | CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor) |
||
47 | |||
48 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_STRING \ |
||
49 | CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE(CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR) |
||
50 | |||
51 | LLVM_CLANG_C_EXTERN_C_BEGIN |
||
52 | |||
53 | /** \defgroup CINDEX libclang: C Interface to Clang |
||
54 | * |
||
55 | * The C Interface to Clang provides a relatively small API that exposes |
||
56 | * facilities for parsing source code into an abstract syntax tree (AST), |
||
57 | * loading already-parsed ASTs, traversing the AST, associating |
||
58 | * physical source locations with elements within the AST, and other |
||
59 | * facilities that support Clang-based development tools. |
||
60 | * |
||
61 | * This C interface to Clang will never provide all of the information |
||
62 | * representation stored in Clang's C++ AST, nor should it: the intent is to |
||
63 | * maintain an API that is relatively stable from one release to the next, |
||
64 | * providing only the basic functionality needed to support development tools. |
||
65 | * |
||
66 | * To avoid namespace pollution, data types are prefixed with "CX" and |
||
67 | * functions are prefixed with "clang_". |
||
68 | * |
||
69 | * @{ |
||
70 | */ |
||
71 | |||
72 | /** |
||
73 | * An "index" that consists of a set of translation units that would |
||
74 | * typically be linked together into an executable or library. |
||
75 | */ |
||
76 | typedef void *CXIndex; |
||
77 | |||
78 | /** |
||
79 | * An opaque type representing target information for a given translation |
||
80 | * unit. |
||
81 | */ |
||
82 | typedef struct CXTargetInfoImpl *CXTargetInfo; |
||
83 | |||
84 | /** |
||
85 | * A single translation unit, which resides in an index. |
||
86 | */ |
||
87 | typedef struct CXTranslationUnitImpl *CXTranslationUnit; |
||
88 | |||
89 | /** |
||
90 | * Opaque pointer representing client data that will be passed through |
||
91 | * to various callbacks and visitors. |
||
92 | */ |
||
93 | typedef void *CXClientData; |
||
94 | |||
95 | /** |
||
96 | * Provides the contents of a file that has not yet been saved to disk. |
||
97 | * |
||
98 | * Each CXUnsavedFile instance provides the name of a file on the |
||
99 | * system along with the current contents of that file that have not |
||
100 | * yet been saved to disk. |
||
101 | */ |
||
102 | struct CXUnsavedFile { |
||
103 | /** |
||
104 | * The file whose contents have not yet been saved. |
||
105 | * |
||
106 | * This file must already exist in the file system. |
||
107 | */ |
||
108 | const char *Filename; |
||
109 | |||
110 | /** |
||
111 | * A buffer containing the unsaved contents of this file. |
||
112 | */ |
||
113 | const char *Contents; |
||
114 | |||
115 | /** |
||
116 | * The length of the unsaved contents of this buffer. |
||
117 | */ |
||
118 | unsigned long Length; |
||
119 | }; |
||
120 | |||
121 | /** |
||
122 | * Describes the availability of a particular entity, which indicates |
||
123 | * whether the use of this entity will result in a warning or error due to |
||
124 | * it being deprecated or unavailable. |
||
125 | */ |
||
126 | enum CXAvailabilityKind { |
||
127 | /** |
||
128 | * The entity is available. |
||
129 | */ |
||
130 | CXAvailability_Available, |
||
131 | /** |
||
132 | * The entity is available, but has been deprecated (and its use is |
||
133 | * not recommended). |
||
134 | */ |
||
135 | CXAvailability_Deprecated, |
||
136 | /** |
||
137 | * The entity is not available; any use of it will be an error. |
||
138 | */ |
||
139 | CXAvailability_NotAvailable, |
||
140 | /** |
||
141 | * The entity is available, but not accessible; any use of it will be |
||
142 | * an error. |
||
143 | */ |
||
144 | CXAvailability_NotAccessible |
||
145 | }; |
||
146 | |||
147 | /** |
||
148 | * Describes a version number of the form major.minor.subminor. |
||
149 | */ |
||
150 | typedef struct CXVersion { |
||
151 | /** |
||
152 | * The major version number, e.g., the '10' in '10.7.3'. A negative |
||
153 | * value indicates that there is no version number at all. |
||
154 | */ |
||
155 | int Major; |
||
156 | /** |
||
157 | * The minor version number, e.g., the '7' in '10.7.3'. This value |
||
158 | * will be negative if no minor version number was provided, e.g., for |
||
159 | * version '10'. |
||
160 | */ |
||
161 | int Minor; |
||
162 | /** |
||
163 | * The subminor version number, e.g., the '3' in '10.7.3'. This value |
||
164 | * will be negative if no minor or subminor version number was provided, |
||
165 | * e.g., in version '10' or '10.7'. |
||
166 | */ |
||
167 | int Subminor; |
||
168 | } CXVersion; |
||
169 | |||
170 | /** |
||
171 | * Describes the exception specification of a cursor. |
||
172 | * |
||
173 | * A negative value indicates that the cursor is not a function declaration. |
||
174 | */ |
||
175 | enum CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind { |
||
176 | /** |
||
177 | * The cursor has no exception specification. |
||
178 | */ |
||
179 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_None, |
||
180 | |||
181 | /** |
||
182 | * The cursor has exception specification throw() |
||
183 | */ |
||
184 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_DynamicNone, |
||
185 | |||
186 | /** |
||
187 | * The cursor has exception specification throw(T1, T2) |
||
188 | */ |
||
189 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Dynamic, |
||
190 | |||
191 | /** |
||
192 | * The cursor has exception specification throw(...). |
||
193 | */ |
||
194 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_MSAny, |
||
195 | |||
196 | /** |
||
197 | * The cursor has exception specification basic noexcept. |
||
198 | */ |
||
199 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_BasicNoexcept, |
||
200 | |||
201 | /** |
||
202 | * The cursor has exception specification computed noexcept. |
||
203 | */ |
||
204 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_ComputedNoexcept, |
||
205 | |||
206 | /** |
||
207 | * The exception specification has not yet been evaluated. |
||
208 | */ |
||
209 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Unevaluated, |
||
210 | |||
211 | /** |
||
212 | * The exception specification has not yet been instantiated. |
||
213 | */ |
||
214 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Uninstantiated, |
||
215 | |||
216 | /** |
||
217 | * The exception specification has not been parsed yet. |
||
218 | */ |
||
219 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Unparsed, |
||
220 | |||
221 | /** |
||
222 | * The cursor has a __declspec(nothrow) exception specification. |
||
223 | */ |
||
224 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_NoThrow |
||
225 | }; |
||
226 | |||
227 | /** |
||
228 | * Provides a shared context for creating translation units. |
||
229 | * |
||
230 | * It provides two options: |
||
231 | * |
||
232 | * - excludeDeclarationsFromPCH: When non-zero, allows enumeration of "local" |
||
233 | * declarations (when loading any new translation units). A "local" declaration |
||
234 | * is one that belongs in the translation unit itself and not in a precompiled |
||
235 | * header that was used by the translation unit. If zero, all declarations |
||
236 | * will be enumerated. |
||
237 | * |
||
238 | * Here is an example: |
||
239 | * |
||
240 | * \code |
||
241 | * // excludeDeclsFromPCH = 1, displayDiagnostics=1 |
||
242 | * Idx = clang_createIndex(1, 1); |
||
243 | * |
||
244 | * // IndexTest.pch was produced with the following command: |
||
245 | * // "clang -x c IndexTest.h -emit-ast -o IndexTest.pch" |
||
246 | * TU = clang_createTranslationUnit(Idx, "IndexTest.pch"); |
||
247 | * |
||
248 | * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.pch' |
||
249 | * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU), |
||
250 | * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0); |
||
251 | * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU); |
||
252 | * |
||
253 | * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.c', excluding symbols |
||
254 | * // from 'IndexTest.pch'. |
||
255 | * char *args[] = { "-Xclang", "-include-pch=IndexTest.pch" }; |
||
256 | * TU = clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(Idx, "IndexTest.c", 2, args, |
||
257 | * 0, 0); |
||
258 | * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU), |
||
259 | * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0); |
||
260 | * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU); |
||
261 | * \endcode |
||
262 | * |
||
263 | * This process of creating the 'pch', loading it separately, and using it (via |
||
264 | * -include-pch) allows 'excludeDeclsFromPCH' to remove redundant callbacks |
||
265 | * (which gives the indexer the same performance benefit as the compiler). |
||
266 | */ |
||
267 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndex clang_createIndex(int excludeDeclarationsFromPCH, |
||
268 | int displayDiagnostics); |
||
269 | |||
270 | /** |
||
271 | * Destroy the given index. |
||
272 | * |
||
273 | * The index must not be destroyed until all of the translation units created |
||
274 | * within that index have been destroyed. |
||
275 | */ |
||
276 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeIndex(CXIndex index); |
||
277 | |||
278 | typedef enum { |
||
279 | /** |
||
280 | * Used to indicate that no special CXIndex options are needed. |
||
281 | */ |
||
282 | CXGlobalOpt_None = 0x0, |
||
283 | |||
284 | /** |
||
285 | * Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for indexing |
||
286 | * purposes should use background priority. |
||
287 | * |
||
288 | * Affects #clang_indexSourceFile, #clang_indexTranslationUnit, |
||
289 | * #clang_parseTranslationUnit, #clang_saveTranslationUnit. |
||
290 | */ |
||
291 | CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing = 0x1, |
||
292 | |||
293 | /** |
||
294 | * Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for editing |
||
295 | * purposes should use background priority. |
||
296 | * |
||
297 | * Affects #clang_reparseTranslationUnit, #clang_codeCompleteAt, |
||
298 | * #clang_annotateTokens |
||
299 | */ |
||
300 | CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing = 0x2, |
||
301 | |||
302 | /** |
||
303 | * Used to indicate that all threads that libclang creates should use |
||
304 | * background priority. |
||
305 | */ |
||
306 | CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForAll = |
||
307 | CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing | |
||
308 | CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing |
||
309 | |||
310 | } CXGlobalOptFlags; |
||
311 | |||
312 | /** |
||
313 | * Sets general options associated with a CXIndex. |
||
314 | * |
||
315 | * For example: |
||
316 | * \code |
||
317 | * CXIndex idx = ...; |
||
318 | * clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(idx, |
||
319 | * clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(idx) | |
||
320 | * CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing); |
||
321 | * \endcode |
||
322 | * |
||
323 | * \param options A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags. |
||
324 | */ |
||
325 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(CXIndex, unsigned options); |
||
326 | |||
327 | /** |
||
328 | * Gets the general options associated with a CXIndex. |
||
329 | * |
||
330 | * \returns A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags that |
||
331 | * are associated with the given CXIndex object. |
||
332 | */ |
||
333 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(CXIndex); |
||
334 | |||
335 | /** |
||
336 | * Sets the invocation emission path option in a CXIndex. |
||
337 | * |
||
338 | * The invocation emission path specifies a path which will contain log |
||
339 | * files for certain libclang invocations. A null value (default) implies that |
||
340 | * libclang invocations are not logged.. |
||
341 | */ |
||
342 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void |
||
343 | clang_CXIndex_setInvocationEmissionPathOption(CXIndex, const char *Path); |
||
344 | |||
345 | /** |
||
346 | * Determine whether the given header is guarded against |
||
347 | * multiple inclusions, either with the conventional |
||
348 | * \#ifndef/\#define/\#endif macro guards or with \#pragma once. |
||
349 | */ |
||
350 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isFileMultipleIncludeGuarded(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
||
351 | CXFile file); |
||
352 | |||
353 | /** |
||
354 | * Retrieve a file handle within the given translation unit. |
||
355 | * |
||
356 | * \param tu the translation unit |
||
357 | * |
||
358 | * \param file_name the name of the file. |
||
359 | * |
||
360 | * \returns the file handle for the named file in the translation unit \p tu, |
||
361 | * or a NULL file handle if the file was not a part of this translation unit. |
||
362 | */ |
||
363 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getFile(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
||
364 | const char *file_name); |
||
365 | |||
366 | /** |
||
367 | * Retrieve the buffer associated with the given file. |
||
368 | * |
||
369 | * \param tu the translation unit |
||
370 | * |
||
371 | * \param file the file for which to retrieve the buffer. |
||
372 | * |
||
373 | * \param size [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the size of the buffer. |
||
374 | * |
||
375 | * \returns a pointer to the buffer in memory that holds the contents of |
||
376 | * \p file, or a NULL pointer when the file is not loaded. |
||
377 | */ |
||
378 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const char *clang_getFileContents(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
||
379 | CXFile file, size_t *size); |
||
380 | |||
381 | /** |
||
382 | * Retrieves the source location associated with a given file/line/column |
||
383 | * in a particular translation unit. |
||
384 | */ |
||
385 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocation(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
||
386 | CXFile file, unsigned line, |
||
387 | unsigned column); |
||
388 | /** |
||
389 | * Retrieves the source location associated with a given character offset |
||
390 | * in a particular translation unit. |
||
391 | */ |
||
392 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocationForOffset(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
||
393 | CXFile file, |
||
394 | unsigned offset); |
||
395 | |||
396 | /** |
||
397 | * Retrieve all ranges that were skipped by the preprocessor. |
||
398 | * |
||
399 | * The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an |
||
400 | * if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true. |
||
401 | */ |
||
402 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList *clang_getSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
||
403 | CXFile file); |
||
404 | |||
405 | /** |
||
406 | * Retrieve all ranges from all files that were skipped by the |
||
407 | * preprocessor. |
||
408 | * |
||
409 | * The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an |
||
410 | * if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true. |
||
411 | */ |
||
412 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList * |
||
413 | clang_getAllSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu); |
||
414 | |||
415 | /** |
||
416 | * Determine the number of diagnostics produced for the given |
||
417 | * translation unit. |
||
418 | */ |
||
419 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnostics(CXTranslationUnit Unit); |
||
420 | |||
421 | /** |
||
422 | * Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given translation unit. |
||
423 | * |
||
424 | * \param Unit the translation unit to query. |
||
425 | * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve. |
||
426 | * |
||
427 | * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed |
||
428 | * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic(). |
||
429 | */ |
||
430 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnostic(CXTranslationUnit Unit, |
||
431 | unsigned Index); |
||
432 | |||
433 | /** |
||
434 | * Retrieve the complete set of diagnostics associated with a |
||
435 | * translation unit. |
||
436 | * |
||
437 | * \param Unit the translation unit to query. |
||
438 | */ |
||
439 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet |
||
440 | clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU(CXTranslationUnit Unit); |
||
441 | |||
442 | /** |
||
443 | * \defgroup CINDEX_TRANSLATION_UNIT Translation unit manipulation |
||
444 | * |
||
445 | * The routines in this group provide the ability to create and destroy |
||
446 | * translation units from files, either by parsing the contents of the files or |
||
447 | * by reading in a serialized representation of a translation unit. |
||
448 | * |
||
449 | * @{ |
||
450 | */ |
||
451 | |||
452 | /** |
||
453 | * Get the original translation unit source file name. |
||
454 | */ |
||
455 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString |
||
456 | clang_getTranslationUnitSpelling(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit); |
||
457 | |||
458 | /** |
||
459 | * Return the CXTranslationUnit for a given source file and the provided |
||
460 | * command line arguments one would pass to the compiler. |
||
461 | * |
||
462 | * Note: The 'source_filename' argument is optional. If the caller provides a |
||
463 | * NULL pointer, the name of the source file is expected to reside in the |
||
464 | * specified command line arguments. |
||
465 | * |
||
466 | * Note: When encountered in 'clang_command_line_args', the following options |
||
467 | * are ignored: |
||
468 | * |
||
469 | * '-c' |
||
470 | * '-emit-ast' |
||
471 | * '-fsyntax-only' |
||
472 | * '-o \<output file>' (both '-o' and '\<output file>' are ignored) |
||
473 | * |
||
474 | * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be |
||
475 | * associated. |
||
476 | * |
||
477 | * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the |
||
478 | * source file is included in \p clang_command_line_args. |
||
479 | * |
||
480 | * \param num_clang_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in |
||
481 | * \p clang_command_line_args. |
||
482 | * |
||
483 | * \param clang_command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be |
||
484 | * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process. |
||
485 | * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation |
||
486 | * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c', |
||
487 | * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'. |
||
488 | * |
||
489 | * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p |
||
490 | * unsaved_files. |
||
491 | * |
||
492 | * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk |
||
493 | * but may be required for code completion, including the contents of |
||
494 | * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by |
||
495 | * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to |
||
496 | * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns. |
||
497 | */ |
||
498 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile( |
||
499 | CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename, int num_clang_command_line_args, |
||
500 | const char *const *clang_command_line_args, unsigned num_unsaved_files, |
||
501 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files); |
||
502 | |||
503 | /** |
||
504 | * Same as \c clang_createTranslationUnit2, but returns |
||
505 | * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this |
||
506 | * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed |
||
507 | * error codes. |
||
508 | */ |
||
509 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit |
||
510 | clang_createTranslationUnit(CXIndex CIdx, const char *ast_filename); |
||
511 | |||
512 | /** |
||
513 | * Create a translation unit from an AST file (\c -emit-ast). |
||
514 | * |
||
515 | * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created |
||
516 | * \c CXTranslationUnit. |
||
517 | * |
||
518 | * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code. |
||
519 | */ |
||
520 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode |
||
521 | clang_createTranslationUnit2(CXIndex CIdx, const char *ast_filename, |
||
522 | CXTranslationUnit *out_TU); |
||
523 | |||
524 | /** |
||
525 | * Flags that control the creation of translation units. |
||
526 | * |
||
527 | * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise |
||
528 | * ORed together to specify which options should be used when |
||
529 | * constructing the translation unit. |
||
530 | */ |
||
531 | enum CXTranslationUnit_Flags { |
||
532 | /** |
||
533 | * Used to indicate that no special translation-unit options are |
||
534 | * needed. |
||
535 | */ |
||
536 | CXTranslationUnit_None = 0x0, |
||
537 | |||
538 | /** |
||
539 | * Used to indicate that the parser should construct a "detailed" |
||
540 | * preprocessing record, including all macro definitions and instantiations. |
||
541 | * |
||
542 | * Constructing a detailed preprocessing record requires more memory |
||
543 | * and time to parse, since the information contained in the record |
||
544 | * is usually not retained. However, it can be useful for |
||
545 | * applications that require more detailed information about the |
||
546 | * behavior of the preprocessor. |
||
547 | */ |
||
548 | CXTranslationUnit_DetailedPreprocessingRecord = 0x01, |
||
549 | |||
550 | /** |
||
551 | * Used to indicate that the translation unit is incomplete. |
||
552 | * |
||
553 | * When a translation unit is considered "incomplete", semantic |
||
554 | * analysis that is typically performed at the end of the |
||
555 | * translation unit will be suppressed. For example, this suppresses |
||
556 | * the completion of tentative declarations in C and of |
||
557 | * instantiation of implicitly-instantiation function templates in |
||
558 | * C++. This option is typically used when parsing a header with the |
||
559 | * intent of producing a precompiled header. |
||
560 | */ |
||
561 | CXTranslationUnit_Incomplete = 0x02, |
||
562 | |||
563 | /** |
||
564 | * Used to indicate that the translation unit should be built with an |
||
565 | * implicit precompiled header for the preamble. |
||
566 | * |
||
567 | * An implicit precompiled header is used as an optimization when a |
||
568 | * particular translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times |
||
569 | * when the sources aren't changing that often. In this case, an |
||
570 | * implicit precompiled header will be built containing all of the |
||
571 | * initial includes at the top of the main file (what we refer to as |
||
572 | * the "preamble" of the file). In subsequent parses, if the |
||
573 | * preamble or the files in it have not changed, \c |
||
574 | * clang_reparseTranslationUnit() will re-use the implicit |
||
575 | * precompiled header to improve parsing performance. |
||
576 | */ |
||
577 | CXTranslationUnit_PrecompiledPreamble = 0x04, |
||
578 | |||
579 | /** |
||
580 | * Used to indicate that the translation unit should cache some |
||
581 | * code-completion results with each reparse of the source file. |
||
582 | * |
||
583 | * Caching of code-completion results is a performance optimization that |
||
584 | * introduces some overhead to reparsing but improves the performance of |
||
585 | * code-completion operations. |
||
586 | */ |
||
587 | CXTranslationUnit_CacheCompletionResults = 0x08, |
||
588 | |||
589 | /** |
||
590 | * Used to indicate that the translation unit will be serialized with |
||
591 | * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit. |
||
592 | * |
||
593 | * This option is typically used when parsing a header with the intent of |
||
594 | * producing a precompiled header. |
||
595 | */ |
||
596 | CXTranslationUnit_ForSerialization = 0x10, |
||
597 | |||
598 | /** |
||
599 | * DEPRECATED: Enabled chained precompiled preambles in C++. |
||
600 | * |
||
601 | * Note: this is a *temporary* option that is available only while |
||
602 | * we are testing C++ precompiled preamble support. It is deprecated. |
||
603 | */ |
||
604 | CXTranslationUnit_CXXChainedPCH = 0x20, |
||
605 | |||
606 | /** |
||
607 | * Used to indicate that function/method bodies should be skipped while |
||
608 | * parsing. |
||
609 | * |
||
610 | * This option can be used to search for declarations/definitions while |
||
611 | * ignoring the usages. |
||
612 | */ |
||
613 | CXTranslationUnit_SkipFunctionBodies = 0x40, |
||
614 | |||
615 | /** |
||
616 | * Used to indicate that brief documentation comments should be |
||
617 | * included into the set of code completions returned from this translation |
||
618 | * unit. |
||
619 | */ |
||
620 | CXTranslationUnit_IncludeBriefCommentsInCodeCompletion = 0x80, |
||
621 | |||
622 | /** |
||
623 | * Used to indicate that the precompiled preamble should be created on |
||
624 | * the first parse. Otherwise it will be created on the first reparse. This |
||
625 | * trades runtime on the first parse (serializing the preamble takes time) for |
||
626 | * reduced runtime on the second parse (can now reuse the preamble). |
||
627 | */ |
||
628 | CXTranslationUnit_CreatePreambleOnFirstParse = 0x100, |
||
629 | |||
630 | /** |
||
631 | * Do not stop processing when fatal errors are encountered. |
||
632 | * |
||
633 | * When fatal errors are encountered while parsing a translation unit, |
||
634 | * semantic analysis is typically stopped early when compiling code. A common |
||
635 | * source for fatal errors are unresolvable include files. For the |
||
636 | * purposes of an IDE, this is undesirable behavior and as much information |
||
637 | * as possible should be reported. Use this flag to enable this behavior. |
||
638 | */ |
||
639 | CXTranslationUnit_KeepGoing = 0x200, |
||
640 | |||
641 | /** |
||
642 | * Sets the preprocessor in a mode for parsing a single file only. |
||
643 | */ |
||
644 | CXTranslationUnit_SingleFileParse = 0x400, |
||
645 | |||
646 | /** |
||
647 | * Used in combination with CXTranslationUnit_SkipFunctionBodies to |
||
648 | * constrain the skipping of function bodies to the preamble. |
||
649 | * |
||
650 | * The function bodies of the main file are not skipped. |
||
651 | */ |
||
652 | CXTranslationUnit_LimitSkipFunctionBodiesToPreamble = 0x800, |
||
653 | |||
654 | /** |
||
655 | * Used to indicate that attributed types should be included in CXType. |
||
656 | */ |
||
657 | CXTranslationUnit_IncludeAttributedTypes = 0x1000, |
||
658 | |||
659 | /** |
||
660 | * Used to indicate that implicit attributes should be visited. |
||
661 | */ |
||
662 | CXTranslationUnit_VisitImplicitAttributes = 0x2000, |
||
663 | |||
664 | /** |
||
665 | * Used to indicate that non-errors from included files should be ignored. |
||
666 | * |
||
667 | * If set, clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU() will not report e.g. warnings from |
||
668 | * included files anymore. This speeds up clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU() for |
||
669 | * the case where these warnings are not of interest, as for an IDE for |
||
670 | * example, which typically shows only the diagnostics in the main file. |
||
671 | */ |
||
672 | CXTranslationUnit_IgnoreNonErrorsFromIncludedFiles = 0x4000, |
||
673 | |||
674 | /** |
||
675 | * Tells the preprocessor not to skip excluded conditional blocks. |
||
676 | */ |
||
677 | CXTranslationUnit_RetainExcludedConditionalBlocks = 0x8000 |
||
678 | }; |
||
679 | |||
680 | /** |
||
681 | * Returns the set of flags that is suitable for parsing a translation |
||
682 | * unit that is being edited. |
||
683 | * |
||
684 | * The set of flags returned provide options for \c clang_parseTranslationUnit() |
||
685 | * to indicate that the translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times, |
||
686 | * either explicitly (via \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit()) or implicitly |
||
687 | * (e.g., by code completion (\c clang_codeCompletionAt())). The returned flag |
||
688 | * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations (e.g., the precompiled |
||
689 | * preamble) geared toward improving the performance of these routines. The |
||
690 | * set of optimizations enabled may change from one version to the next. |
||
691 | */ |
||
692 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultEditingTranslationUnitOptions(void); |
||
693 | |||
694 | /** |
||
695 | * Same as \c clang_parseTranslationUnit2, but returns |
||
696 | * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this |
||
697 | * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed |
||
698 | * error codes. |
||
699 | */ |
||
700 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_parseTranslationUnit( |
||
701 | CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename, |
||
702 | const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args, |
||
703 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files, |
||
704 | unsigned options); |
||
705 | |||
706 | /** |
||
707 | * Parse the given source file and the translation unit corresponding |
||
708 | * to that file. |
||
709 | * |
||
710 | * This routine is the main entry point for the Clang C API, providing the |
||
711 | * ability to parse a source file into a translation unit that can then be |
||
712 | * queried by other functions in the API. This routine accepts a set of |
||
713 | * command-line arguments so that the compilation can be configured in the same |
||
714 | * way that the compiler is configured on the command line. |
||
715 | * |
||
716 | * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be |
||
717 | * associated. |
||
718 | * |
||
719 | * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the |
||
720 | * source file is included in \c command_line_args. |
||
721 | * |
||
722 | * \param command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be |
||
723 | * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process. |
||
724 | * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation |
||
725 | * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c', |
||
726 | * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'. |
||
727 | * |
||
728 | * \param num_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in |
||
729 | * \c command_line_args. |
||
730 | * |
||
731 | * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk |
||
732 | * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of |
||
733 | * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by |
||
734 | * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to |
||
735 | * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns. |
||
736 | * |
||
737 | * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p |
||
738 | * unsaved_files. |
||
739 | * |
||
740 | * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit |
||
741 | * is managed but not its compilation. This should be a bitwise OR of the |
||
742 | * CXTranslationUnit_XXX flags. |
||
743 | * |
||
744 | * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created |
||
745 | * \c CXTranslationUnit, describing the parsed code and containing any |
||
746 | * diagnostics produced by the compiler. |
||
747 | * |
||
748 | * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code. |
||
749 | */ |
||
750 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_parseTranslationUnit2( |
||
751 | CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename, |
||
752 | const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args, |
||
753 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files, |
||
754 | unsigned options, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU); |
||
755 | |||
756 | /** |
||
757 | * Same as clang_parseTranslationUnit2 but requires a full command line |
||
758 | * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard |
||
759 | * library paths are relative to the binary. |
||
760 | */ |
||
761 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_parseTranslationUnit2FullArgv( |
||
762 | CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename, |
||
763 | const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args, |
||
764 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files, |
||
765 | unsigned options, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU); |
||
766 | |||
767 | /** |
||
768 | * Flags that control how translation units are saved. |
||
769 | * |
||
770 | * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise |
||
771 | * ORed together to specify which options should be used when |
||
772 | * saving the translation unit. |
||
773 | */ |
||
774 | enum CXSaveTranslationUnit_Flags { |
||
775 | /** |
||
776 | * Used to indicate that no special saving options are needed. |
||
777 | */ |
||
778 | CXSaveTranslationUnit_None = 0x0 |
||
779 | }; |
||
780 | |||
781 | /** |
||
782 | * Returns the set of flags that is suitable for saving a translation |
||
783 | * unit. |
||
784 | * |
||
785 | * The set of flags returned provide options for |
||
786 | * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag |
||
787 | * set contains an unspecified set of options that save translation units with |
||
788 | * the most commonly-requested data. |
||
789 | */ |
||
790 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultSaveOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU); |
||
791 | |||
792 | /** |
||
793 | * Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to |
||
794 | * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit(). |
||
795 | */ |
||
796 | enum CXSaveError { |
||
797 | /** |
||
798 | * Indicates that no error occurred while saving a translation unit. |
||
799 | */ |
||
800 | CXSaveError_None = 0, |
||
801 | |||
802 | /** |
||
803 | * Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to save |
||
804 | * the file. |
||
805 | * |
||
806 | * This error typically indicates that file I/O failed when attempting to |
||
807 | * write the file. |
||
808 | */ |
||
809 | CXSaveError_Unknown = 1, |
||
810 | |||
811 | /** |
||
812 | * Indicates that errors during translation prevented this attempt |
||
813 | * to save the translation unit. |
||
814 | * |
||
815 | * Errors that prevent the translation unit from being saved can be |
||
816 | * extracted using \c clang_getNumDiagnostics() and \c clang_getDiagnostic(). |
||
817 | */ |
||
818 | CXSaveError_TranslationErrors = 2, |
||
819 | |||
820 | /** |
||
821 | * Indicates that the translation unit to be saved was somehow |
||
822 | * invalid (e.g., NULL). |
||
823 | */ |
||
824 | CXSaveError_InvalidTU = 3 |
||
825 | }; |
||
826 | |||
827 | /** |
||
828 | * Saves a translation unit into a serialized representation of |
||
829 | * that translation unit on disk. |
||
830 | * |
||
831 | * Any translation unit that was parsed without error can be saved |
||
832 | * into a file. The translation unit can then be deserialized into a |
||
833 | * new \c CXTranslationUnit with \c clang_createTranslationUnit() or, |
||
834 | * if it is an incomplete translation unit that corresponds to a |
||
835 | * header, used as a precompiled header when parsing other translation |
||
836 | * units. |
||
837 | * |
||
838 | * \param TU The translation unit to save. |
||
839 | * |
||
840 | * \param FileName The file to which the translation unit will be saved. |
||
841 | * |
||
842 | * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit |
||
843 | * is saved. This should be a bitwise OR of the |
||
844 | * CXSaveTranslationUnit_XXX flags. |
||
845 | * |
||
846 | * \returns A value that will match one of the enumerators of the CXSaveError |
||
847 | * enumeration. Zero (CXSaveError_None) indicates that the translation unit was |
||
848 | * saved successfully, while a non-zero value indicates that a problem occurred. |
||
849 | */ |
||
850 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_saveTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU, |
||
851 | const char *FileName, |
||
852 | unsigned options); |
||
853 | |||
854 | /** |
||
855 | * Suspend a translation unit in order to free memory associated with it. |
||
856 | * |
||
857 | * A suspended translation unit uses significantly less memory but on the other |
||
858 | * side does not support any other calls than \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit |
||
859 | * to resume it or \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit to dispose it completely. |
||
860 | */ |
||
861 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_suspendTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit); |
||
862 | |||
863 | /** |
||
864 | * Destroy the specified CXTranslationUnit object. |
||
865 | */ |
||
866 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit); |
||
867 | |||
868 | /** |
||
869 | * Flags that control the reparsing of translation units. |
||
870 | * |
||
871 | * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise |
||
872 | * ORed together to specify which options should be used when |
||
873 | * reparsing the translation unit. |
||
874 | */ |
||
875 | enum CXReparse_Flags { |
||
876 | /** |
||
877 | * Used to indicate that no special reparsing options are needed. |
||
878 | */ |
||
879 | CXReparse_None = 0x0 |
||
880 | }; |
||
881 | |||
882 | /** |
||
883 | * Returns the set of flags that is suitable for reparsing a translation |
||
884 | * unit. |
||
885 | * |
||
886 | * The set of flags returned provide options for |
||
887 | * \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag |
||
888 | * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations geared toward common uses |
||
889 | * of reparsing. The set of optimizations enabled may change from one version |
||
890 | * to the next. |
||
891 | */ |
||
892 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultReparseOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU); |
||
893 | |||
894 | /** |
||
895 | * Reparse the source files that produced this translation unit. |
||
896 | * |
||
897 | * This routine can be used to re-parse the source files that originally |
||
898 | * created the given translation unit, for example because those source files |
||
899 | * have changed (either on disk or as passed via \p unsaved_files). The |
||
900 | * source code will be reparsed with the same command-line options as it |
||
901 | * was originally parsed. |
||
902 | * |
||
903 | * Reparsing a translation unit invalidates all cursors and source locations |
||
904 | * that refer into that translation unit. This makes reparsing a translation |
||
905 | * unit semantically equivalent to destroying the translation unit and then |
||
906 | * creating a new translation unit with the same command-line arguments. |
||
907 | * However, it may be more efficient to reparse a translation |
||
908 | * unit using this routine. |
||
909 | * |
||
910 | * \param TU The translation unit whose contents will be re-parsed. The |
||
911 | * translation unit must originally have been built with |
||
912 | * \c clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(). |
||
913 | * |
||
914 | * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p |
||
915 | * unsaved_files. |
||
916 | * |
||
917 | * \param unsaved_files The files that have not yet been saved to disk |
||
918 | * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of |
||
919 | * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by |
||
920 | * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to |
||
921 | * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns. |
||
922 | * |
||
923 | * \param options A bitset of options composed of the flags in CXReparse_Flags. |
||
924 | * The function \c clang_defaultReparseOptions() produces a default set of |
||
925 | * options recommended for most uses, based on the translation unit. |
||
926 | * |
||
927 | * \returns 0 if the sources could be reparsed. A non-zero error code will be |
||
928 | * returned if reparsing was impossible, such that the translation unit is |
||
929 | * invalid. In such cases, the only valid call for \c TU is |
||
930 | * \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU). The error codes returned by this |
||
931 | * routine are described by the \c CXErrorCode enum. |
||
932 | */ |
||
933 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int |
||
934 | clang_reparseTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU, unsigned num_unsaved_files, |
||
935 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, |
||
936 | unsigned options); |
||
937 | |||
938 | /** |
||
939 | * Categorizes how memory is being used by a translation unit. |
||
940 | */ |
||
941 | enum CXTUResourceUsageKind { |
||
942 | CXTUResourceUsage_AST = 1, |
||
943 | CXTUResourceUsage_Identifiers = 2, |
||
944 | CXTUResourceUsage_Selectors = 3, |
||
945 | CXTUResourceUsage_GlobalCompletionResults = 4, |
||
946 | CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManagerContentCache = 5, |
||
947 | CXTUResourceUsage_AST_SideTables = 6, |
||
948 | CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_Malloc = 7, |
||
949 | CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_MMap = 8, |
||
950 | CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_Malloc = 9, |
||
951 | CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_MMap = 10, |
||
952 | CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor = 11, |
||
953 | CXTUResourceUsage_PreprocessingRecord = 12, |
||
954 | CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_DataStructures = 13, |
||
955 | CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch = 14, |
||
956 | CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_BEGIN = CXTUResourceUsage_AST, |
||
957 | CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_END = |
||
958 | CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch, |
||
959 | |||
960 | CXTUResourceUsage_First = CXTUResourceUsage_AST, |
||
961 | CXTUResourceUsage_Last = CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch |
||
962 | }; |
||
963 | |||
964 | /** |
||
965 | * Returns the human-readable null-terminated C string that represents |
||
966 | * the name of the memory category. This string should never be freed. |
||
967 | */ |
||
968 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
969 | const char *clang_getTUResourceUsageName(enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind); |
||
970 | |||
971 | typedef struct CXTUResourceUsageEntry { |
||
972 | /* The memory usage category. */ |
||
973 | enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind; |
||
974 | /* Amount of resources used. |
||
975 | The units will depend on the resource kind. */ |
||
976 | unsigned long amount; |
||
977 | } CXTUResourceUsageEntry; |
||
978 | |||
979 | /** |
||
980 | * The memory usage of a CXTranslationUnit, broken into categories. |
||
981 | */ |
||
982 | typedef struct CXTUResourceUsage { |
||
983 | /* Private data member, used for queries. */ |
||
984 | void *data; |
||
985 | |||
986 | /* The number of entries in the 'entries' array. */ |
||
987 | unsigned numEntries; |
||
988 | |||
989 | /* An array of key-value pairs, representing the breakdown of memory |
||
990 | usage. */ |
||
991 | CXTUResourceUsageEntry *entries; |
||
992 | |||
993 | } CXTUResourceUsage; |
||
994 | |||
995 | /** |
||
996 | * Return the memory usage of a translation unit. This object |
||
997 | * should be released with clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage(). |
||
998 | */ |
||
999 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTUResourceUsage |
||
1000 | clang_getCXTUResourceUsage(CXTranslationUnit TU); |
||
1001 | |||
1002 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage(CXTUResourceUsage usage); |
||
1003 | |||
1004 | /** |
||
1005 | * Get target information for this translation unit. |
||
1006 | * |
||
1007 | * The CXTargetInfo object cannot outlive the CXTranslationUnit object. |
||
1008 | */ |
||
1009 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTargetInfo |
||
1010 | clang_getTranslationUnitTargetInfo(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit); |
||
1011 | |||
1012 | /** |
||
1013 | * Destroy the CXTargetInfo object. |
||
1014 | */ |
||
1015 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_TargetInfo_dispose(CXTargetInfo Info); |
||
1016 | |||
1017 | /** |
||
1018 | * Get the normalized target triple as a string. |
||
1019 | * |
||
1020 | * Returns the empty string in case of any error. |
||
1021 | */ |
||
1022 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_TargetInfo_getTriple(CXTargetInfo Info); |
||
1023 | |||
1024 | /** |
||
1025 | * Get the pointer width of the target in bits. |
||
1026 | * |
||
1027 | * Returns -1 in case of error. |
||
1028 | */ |
||
1029 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_TargetInfo_getPointerWidth(CXTargetInfo Info); |
||
1030 | |||
1031 | /** |
||
1032 | * @} |
||
1033 | */ |
||
1034 | |||
1035 | /** |
||
1036 | * Describes the kind of entity that a cursor refers to. |
||
1037 | */ |
||
1038 | enum CXCursorKind { |
||
1039 | /* Declarations */ |
||
1040 | /** |
||
1041 | * A declaration whose specific kind is not exposed via this |
||
1042 | * interface. |
||
1043 | * |
||
1044 | * Unexposed declarations have the same operations as any other kind |
||
1045 | * of declaration; one can extract their location information, |
||
1046 | * spelling, find their definitions, etc. However, the specific kind |
||
1047 | * of the declaration is not reported. |
||
1048 | */ |
||
1049 | CXCursor_UnexposedDecl = 1, |
||
1050 | /** A C or C++ struct. */ |
||
1051 | CXCursor_StructDecl = 2, |
||
1052 | /** A C or C++ union. */ |
||
1053 | CXCursor_UnionDecl = 3, |
||
1054 | /** A C++ class. */ |
||
1055 | CXCursor_ClassDecl = 4, |
||
1056 | /** An enumeration. */ |
||
1057 | CXCursor_EnumDecl = 5, |
||
1058 | /** |
||
1059 | * A field (in C) or non-static data member (in C++) in a |
||
1060 | * struct, union, or C++ class. |
||
1061 | */ |
||
1062 | CXCursor_FieldDecl = 6, |
||
1063 | /** An enumerator constant. */ |
||
1064 | CXCursor_EnumConstantDecl = 7, |
||
1065 | /** A function. */ |
||
1066 | CXCursor_FunctionDecl = 8, |
||
1067 | /** A variable. */ |
||
1068 | CXCursor_VarDecl = 9, |
||
1069 | /** A function or method parameter. */ |
||
1070 | CXCursor_ParmDecl = 10, |
||
1071 | /** An Objective-C \@interface. */ |
||
1072 | CXCursor_ObjCInterfaceDecl = 11, |
||
1073 | /** An Objective-C \@interface for a category. */ |
||
1074 | CXCursor_ObjCCategoryDecl = 12, |
||
1075 | /** An Objective-C \@protocol declaration. */ |
||
1076 | CXCursor_ObjCProtocolDecl = 13, |
||
1077 | /** An Objective-C \@property declaration. */ |
||
1078 | CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl = 14, |
||
1079 | /** An Objective-C instance variable. */ |
||
1080 | CXCursor_ObjCIvarDecl = 15, |
||
1081 | /** An Objective-C instance method. */ |
||
1082 | CXCursor_ObjCInstanceMethodDecl = 16, |
||
1083 | /** An Objective-C class method. */ |
||
1084 | CXCursor_ObjCClassMethodDecl = 17, |
||
1085 | /** An Objective-C \@implementation. */ |
||
1086 | CXCursor_ObjCImplementationDecl = 18, |
||
1087 | /** An Objective-C \@implementation for a category. */ |
||
1088 | CXCursor_ObjCCategoryImplDecl = 19, |
||
1089 | /** A typedef. */ |
||
1090 | CXCursor_TypedefDecl = 20, |
||
1091 | /** A C++ class method. */ |
||
1092 | CXCursor_CXXMethod = 21, |
||
1093 | /** A C++ namespace. */ |
||
1094 | CXCursor_Namespace = 22, |
||
1095 | /** A linkage specification, e.g. 'extern "C"'. */ |
||
1096 | CXCursor_LinkageSpec = 23, |
||
1097 | /** A C++ constructor. */ |
||
1098 | CXCursor_Constructor = 24, |
||
1099 | /** A C++ destructor. */ |
||
1100 | CXCursor_Destructor = 25, |
||
1101 | /** A C++ conversion function. */ |
||
1102 | CXCursor_ConversionFunction = 26, |
||
1103 | /** A C++ template type parameter. */ |
||
1104 | CXCursor_TemplateTypeParameter = 27, |
||
1105 | /** A C++ non-type template parameter. */ |
||
1106 | CXCursor_NonTypeTemplateParameter = 28, |
||
1107 | /** A C++ template template parameter. */ |
||
1108 | CXCursor_TemplateTemplateParameter = 29, |
||
1109 | /** A C++ function template. */ |
||
1110 | CXCursor_FunctionTemplate = 30, |
||
1111 | /** A C++ class template. */ |
||
1112 | CXCursor_ClassTemplate = 31, |
||
1113 | /** A C++ class template partial specialization. */ |
||
1114 | CXCursor_ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization = 32, |
||
1115 | /** A C++ namespace alias declaration. */ |
||
1116 | CXCursor_NamespaceAlias = 33, |
||
1117 | /** A C++ using directive. */ |
||
1118 | CXCursor_UsingDirective = 34, |
||
1119 | /** A C++ using declaration. */ |
||
1120 | CXCursor_UsingDeclaration = 35, |
||
1121 | /** A C++ alias declaration */ |
||
1122 | CXCursor_TypeAliasDecl = 36, |
||
1123 | /** An Objective-C \@synthesize definition. */ |
||
1124 | CXCursor_ObjCSynthesizeDecl = 37, |
||
1125 | /** An Objective-C \@dynamic definition. */ |
||
1126 | CXCursor_ObjCDynamicDecl = 38, |
||
1127 | /** An access specifier. */ |
||
1128 | CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier = 39, |
||
1129 | |||
1130 | CXCursor_FirstDecl = CXCursor_UnexposedDecl, |
||
1131 | CXCursor_LastDecl = CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier, |
||
1132 | |||
1133 | /* References */ |
||
1134 | CXCursor_FirstRef = 40, /* Decl references */ |
||
1135 | CXCursor_ObjCSuperClassRef = 40, |
||
1136 | CXCursor_ObjCProtocolRef = 41, |
||
1137 | CXCursor_ObjCClassRef = 42, |
||
1138 | /** |
||
1139 | * A reference to a type declaration. |
||
1140 | * |
||
1141 | * A type reference occurs anywhere where a type is named but not |
||
1142 | * declared. For example, given: |
||
1143 | * |
||
1144 | * \code |
||
1145 | * typedef unsigned size_type; |
||
1146 | * size_type size; |
||
1147 | * \endcode |
||
1148 | * |
||
1149 | * The typedef is a declaration of size_type (CXCursor_TypedefDecl), |
||
1150 | * while the type of the variable "size" is referenced. The cursor |
||
1151 | * referenced by the type of size is the typedef for size_type. |
||
1152 | */ |
||
1153 | CXCursor_TypeRef = 43, |
||
1154 | CXCursor_CXXBaseSpecifier = 44, |
||
1155 | /** |
||
1156 | * A reference to a class template, function template, template |
||
1157 | * template parameter, or class template partial specialization. |
||
1158 | */ |
||
1159 | CXCursor_TemplateRef = 45, |
||
1160 | /** |
||
1161 | * A reference to a namespace or namespace alias. |
||
1162 | */ |
||
1163 | CXCursor_NamespaceRef = 46, |
||
1164 | /** |
||
1165 | * A reference to a member of a struct, union, or class that occurs in |
||
1166 | * some non-expression context, e.g., a designated initializer. |
||
1167 | */ |
||
1168 | CXCursor_MemberRef = 47, |
||
1169 | /** |
||
1170 | * A reference to a labeled statement. |
||
1171 | * |
||
1172 | * This cursor kind is used to describe the jump to "start_over" in the |
||
1173 | * goto statement in the following example: |
||
1174 | * |
||
1175 | * \code |
||
1176 | * start_over: |
||
1177 | * ++counter; |
||
1178 | * |
||
1179 | * goto start_over; |
||
1180 | * \endcode |
||
1181 | * |
||
1182 | * A label reference cursor refers to a label statement. |
||
1183 | */ |
||
1184 | CXCursor_LabelRef = 48, |
||
1185 | |||
1186 | /** |
||
1187 | * A reference to a set of overloaded functions or function templates |
||
1188 | * that has not yet been resolved to a specific function or function template. |
||
1189 | * |
||
1190 | * An overloaded declaration reference cursor occurs in C++ templates where |
||
1191 | * a dependent name refers to a function. For example: |
||
1192 | * |
||
1193 | * \code |
||
1194 | * template<typename T> void swap(T&, T&); |
||
1195 | * |
||
1196 | * struct X { ... }; |
||
1197 | * void swap(X&, X&); |
||
1198 | * |
||
1199 | * template<typename T> |
||
1200 | * void reverse(T* first, T* last) { |
||
1201 | * while (first < last - 1) { |
||
1202 | * swap(*first, *--last); |
||
1203 | * ++first; |
||
1204 | * } |
||
1205 | * } |
||
1206 | * |
||
1207 | * struct Y { }; |
||
1208 | * void swap(Y&, Y&); |
||
1209 | * \endcode |
||
1210 | * |
||
1211 | * Here, the identifier "swap" is associated with an overloaded declaration |
||
1212 | * reference. In the template definition, "swap" refers to either of the two |
||
1213 | * "swap" functions declared above, so both results will be available. At |
||
1214 | * instantiation time, "swap" may also refer to other functions found via |
||
1215 | * argument-dependent lookup (e.g., the "swap" function at the end of the |
||
1216 | * example). |
||
1217 | * |
||
1218 | * The functions \c clang_getNumOverloadedDecls() and |
||
1219 | * \c clang_getOverloadedDecl() can be used to retrieve the definitions |
||
1220 | * referenced by this cursor. |
||
1221 | */ |
||
1222 | CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef = 49, |
||
1223 | |||
1224 | /** |
||
1225 | * A reference to a variable that occurs in some non-expression |
||
1226 | * context, e.g., a C++ lambda capture list. |
||
1227 | */ |
||
1228 | CXCursor_VariableRef = 50, |
||
1229 | |||
1230 | CXCursor_LastRef = CXCursor_VariableRef, |
||
1231 | |||
1232 | /* Error conditions */ |
||
1233 | CXCursor_FirstInvalid = 70, |
||
1234 | CXCursor_InvalidFile = 70, |
||
1235 | CXCursor_NoDeclFound = 71, |
||
1236 | CXCursor_NotImplemented = 72, |
||
1237 | CXCursor_InvalidCode = 73, |
||
1238 | CXCursor_LastInvalid = CXCursor_InvalidCode, |
||
1239 | |||
1240 | /* Expressions */ |
||
1241 | CXCursor_FirstExpr = 100, |
||
1242 | |||
1243 | /** |
||
1244 | * An expression whose specific kind is not exposed via this |
||
1245 | * interface. |
||
1246 | * |
||
1247 | * Unexposed expressions have the same operations as any other kind |
||
1248 | * of expression; one can extract their location information, |
||
1249 | * spelling, children, etc. However, the specific kind of the |
||
1250 | * expression is not reported. |
||
1251 | */ |
||
1252 | CXCursor_UnexposedExpr = 100, |
||
1253 | |||
1254 | /** |
||
1255 | * An expression that refers to some value declaration, such |
||
1256 | * as a function, variable, or enumerator. |
||
1257 | */ |
||
1258 | CXCursor_DeclRefExpr = 101, |
||
1259 | |||
1260 | /** |
||
1261 | * An expression that refers to a member of a struct, union, |
||
1262 | * class, Objective-C class, etc. |
||
1263 | */ |
||
1264 | CXCursor_MemberRefExpr = 102, |
||
1265 | |||
1266 | /** An expression that calls a function. */ |
||
1267 | CXCursor_CallExpr = 103, |
||
1268 | |||
1269 | /** An expression that sends a message to an Objective-C |
||
1270 | object or class. */ |
||
1271 | CXCursor_ObjCMessageExpr = 104, |
||
1272 | |||
1273 | /** An expression that represents a block literal. */ |
||
1274 | CXCursor_BlockExpr = 105, |
||
1275 | |||
1276 | /** An integer literal. |
||
1277 | */ |
||
1278 | CXCursor_IntegerLiteral = 106, |
||
1279 | |||
1280 | /** A floating point number literal. |
||
1281 | */ |
||
1282 | CXCursor_FloatingLiteral = 107, |
||
1283 | |||
1284 | /** An imaginary number literal. |
||
1285 | */ |
||
1286 | CXCursor_ImaginaryLiteral = 108, |
||
1287 | |||
1288 | /** A string literal. |
||
1289 | */ |
||
1290 | CXCursor_StringLiteral = 109, |
||
1291 | |||
1292 | /** A character literal. |
||
1293 | */ |
||
1294 | CXCursor_CharacterLiteral = 110, |
||
1295 | |||
1296 | /** A parenthesized expression, e.g. "(1)". |
||
1297 | * |
||
1298 | * This AST node is only formed if full location information is requested. |
||
1299 | */ |
||
1300 | CXCursor_ParenExpr = 111, |
||
1301 | |||
1302 | /** This represents the unary-expression's (except sizeof and |
||
1303 | * alignof). |
||
1304 | */ |
||
1305 | CXCursor_UnaryOperator = 112, |
||
1306 | |||
1307 | /** [C99 6.5.2.1] Array Subscripting. |
||
1308 | */ |
||
1309 | CXCursor_ArraySubscriptExpr = 113, |
||
1310 | |||
1311 | /** A builtin binary operation expression such as "x + y" or |
||
1312 | * "x <= y". |
||
1313 | */ |
||
1314 | CXCursor_BinaryOperator = 114, |
||
1315 | |||
1316 | /** Compound assignment such as "+=". |
||
1317 | */ |
||
1318 | CXCursor_CompoundAssignOperator = 115, |
||
1319 | |||
1320 | /** The ?: ternary operator. |
||
1321 | */ |
||
1322 | CXCursor_ConditionalOperator = 116, |
||
1323 | |||
1324 | /** An explicit cast in C (C99 6.5.4) or a C-style cast in C++ |
||
1325 | * (C++ [expr.cast]), which uses the syntax (Type)expr. |
||
1326 | * |
||
1327 | * For example: (int)f. |
||
1328 | */ |
||
1329 | CXCursor_CStyleCastExpr = 117, |
||
1330 | |||
1331 | /** [C99 6.5.2.5] |
||
1332 | */ |
||
1333 | CXCursor_CompoundLiteralExpr = 118, |
||
1334 | |||
1335 | /** Describes an C or C++ initializer list. |
||
1336 | */ |
||
1337 | CXCursor_InitListExpr = 119, |
||
1338 | |||
1339 | /** The GNU address of label extension, representing &&label. |
||
1340 | */ |
||
1341 | CXCursor_AddrLabelExpr = 120, |
||
1342 | |||
1343 | /** This is the GNU Statement Expression extension: ({int X=4; X;}) |
||
1344 | */ |
||
1345 | CXCursor_StmtExpr = 121, |
||
1346 | |||
1347 | /** Represents a C11 generic selection. |
||
1348 | */ |
||
1349 | CXCursor_GenericSelectionExpr = 122, |
||
1350 | |||
1351 | /** Implements the GNU __null extension, which is a name for a null |
||
1352 | * pointer constant that has integral type (e.g., int or long) and is the same |
||
1353 | * size and alignment as a pointer. |
||
1354 | * |
||
1355 | * The __null extension is typically only used by system headers, which define |
||
1356 | * NULL as __null in C++ rather than using 0 (which is an integer that may not |
||
1357 | * match the size of a pointer). |
||
1358 | */ |
||
1359 | CXCursor_GNUNullExpr = 123, |
||
1360 | |||
1361 | /** C++'s static_cast<> expression. |
||
1362 | */ |
||
1363 | CXCursor_CXXStaticCastExpr = 124, |
||
1364 | |||
1365 | /** C++'s dynamic_cast<> expression. |
||
1366 | */ |
||
1367 | CXCursor_CXXDynamicCastExpr = 125, |
||
1368 | |||
1369 | /** C++'s reinterpret_cast<> expression. |
||
1370 | */ |
||
1371 | CXCursor_CXXReinterpretCastExpr = 126, |
||
1372 | |||
1373 | /** C++'s const_cast<> expression. |
||
1374 | */ |
||
1375 | CXCursor_CXXConstCastExpr = 127, |
||
1376 | |||
1377 | /** Represents an explicit C++ type conversion that uses "functional" |
||
1378 | * notion (C++ [expr.type.conv]). |
||
1379 | * |
||
1380 | * Example: |
||
1381 | * \code |
||
1382 | * x = int(0.5); |
||
1383 | * \endcode |
||
1384 | */ |
||
1385 | CXCursor_CXXFunctionalCastExpr = 128, |
||
1386 | |||
1387 | /** A C++ typeid expression (C++ [expr.typeid]). |
||
1388 | */ |
||
1389 | CXCursor_CXXTypeidExpr = 129, |
||
1390 | |||
1391 | /** [C++ 2.13.5] C++ Boolean Literal. |
||
1392 | */ |
||
1393 | CXCursor_CXXBoolLiteralExpr = 130, |
||
1394 | |||
1395 | /** [C++0x 2.14.7] C++ Pointer Literal. |
||
1396 | */ |
||
1397 | CXCursor_CXXNullPtrLiteralExpr = 131, |
||
1398 | |||
1399 | /** Represents the "this" expression in C++ |
||
1400 | */ |
||
1401 | CXCursor_CXXThisExpr = 132, |
||
1402 | |||
1403 | /** [C++ 15] C++ Throw Expression. |
||
1404 | * |
||
1405 | * This handles 'throw' and 'throw' assignment-expression. When |
||
1406 | * assignment-expression isn't present, Op will be null. |
||
1407 | */ |
||
1408 | CXCursor_CXXThrowExpr = 133, |
||
1409 | |||
1410 | /** A new expression for memory allocation and constructor calls, e.g: |
||
1411 | * "new CXXNewExpr(foo)". |
||
1412 | */ |
||
1413 | CXCursor_CXXNewExpr = 134, |
||
1414 | |||
1415 | /** A delete expression for memory deallocation and destructor calls, |
||
1416 | * e.g. "delete[] pArray". |
||
1417 | */ |
||
1418 | CXCursor_CXXDeleteExpr = 135, |
||
1419 | |||
1420 | /** A unary expression. (noexcept, sizeof, or other traits) |
||
1421 | */ |
||
1422 | CXCursor_UnaryExpr = 136, |
||
1423 | |||
1424 | /** An Objective-C string literal i.e. @"foo". |
||
1425 | */ |
||
1426 | CXCursor_ObjCStringLiteral = 137, |
||
1427 | |||
1428 | /** An Objective-C \@encode expression. |
||
1429 | */ |
||
1430 | CXCursor_ObjCEncodeExpr = 138, |
||
1431 | |||
1432 | /** An Objective-C \@selector expression. |
||
1433 | */ |
||
1434 | CXCursor_ObjCSelectorExpr = 139, |
||
1435 | |||
1436 | /** An Objective-C \@protocol expression. |
||
1437 | */ |
||
1438 | CXCursor_ObjCProtocolExpr = 140, |
||
1439 | |||
1440 | /** An Objective-C "bridged" cast expression, which casts between |
||
1441 | * Objective-C pointers and C pointers, transferring ownership in the process. |
||
1442 | * |
||
1443 | * \code |
||
1444 | * NSString *str = (__bridge_transfer NSString *)CFCreateString(); |
||
1445 | * \endcode |
||
1446 | */ |
||
1447 | CXCursor_ObjCBridgedCastExpr = 141, |
||
1448 | |||
1449 | /** Represents a C++0x pack expansion that produces a sequence of |
||
1450 | * expressions. |
||
1451 | * |
||
1452 | * A pack expansion expression contains a pattern (which itself is an |
||
1453 | * expression) followed by an ellipsis. For example: |
||
1454 | * |
||
1455 | * \code |
||
1456 | * template<typename F, typename ...Types> |
||
1457 | * void forward(F f, Types &&...args) { |
||
1458 | * f(static_cast<Types&&>(args)...); |
||
1459 | * } |
||
1460 | * \endcode |
||
1461 | */ |
||
1462 | CXCursor_PackExpansionExpr = 142, |
||
1463 | |||
1464 | /** Represents an expression that computes the length of a parameter |
||
1465 | * pack. |
||
1466 | * |
||
1467 | * \code |
||
1468 | * template<typename ...Types> |
||
1469 | * struct count { |
||
1470 | * static const unsigned value = sizeof...(Types); |
||
1471 | * }; |
||
1472 | * \endcode |
||
1473 | */ |
||
1474 | CXCursor_SizeOfPackExpr = 143, |
||
1475 | |||
1476 | /* Represents a C++ lambda expression that produces a local function |
||
1477 | * object. |
||
1478 | * |
||
1479 | * \code |
||
1480 | * void abssort(float *x, unsigned N) { |
||
1481 | * std::sort(x, x + N, |
||
1482 | * [](float a, float b) { |
||
1483 | * return std::abs(a) < std::abs(b); |
||
1484 | * }); |
||
1485 | * } |
||
1486 | * \endcode |
||
1487 | */ |
||
1488 | CXCursor_LambdaExpr = 144, |
||
1489 | |||
1490 | /** Objective-c Boolean Literal. |
||
1491 | */ |
||
1492 | CXCursor_ObjCBoolLiteralExpr = 145, |
||
1493 | |||
1494 | /** Represents the "self" expression in an Objective-C method. |
||
1495 | */ |
||
1496 | CXCursor_ObjCSelfExpr = 146, |
||
1497 | |||
1498 | /** OpenMP 5.0 [2.1.5, Array Section]. |
||
1499 | */ |
||
1500 | CXCursor_OMPArraySectionExpr = 147, |
||
1501 | |||
1502 | /** Represents an @available(...) check. |
||
1503 | */ |
||
1504 | CXCursor_ObjCAvailabilityCheckExpr = 148, |
||
1505 | |||
1506 | /** |
||
1507 | * Fixed point literal |
||
1508 | */ |
||
1509 | CXCursor_FixedPointLiteral = 149, |
||
1510 | |||
1511 | /** OpenMP 5.0 [2.1.4, Array Shaping]. |
||
1512 | */ |
||
1513 | CXCursor_OMPArrayShapingExpr = 150, |
||
1514 | |||
1515 | /** |
||
1516 | * OpenMP 5.0 [2.1.6 Iterators] |
||
1517 | */ |
||
1518 | CXCursor_OMPIteratorExpr = 151, |
||
1519 | |||
1520 | /** OpenCL's addrspace_cast<> expression. |
||
1521 | */ |
||
1522 | CXCursor_CXXAddrspaceCastExpr = 152, |
||
1523 | |||
1524 | /** |
||
1525 | * Expression that references a C++20 concept. |
||
1526 | */ |
||
1527 | CXCursor_ConceptSpecializationExpr = 153, |
||
1528 | |||
1529 | /** |
||
1530 | * Expression that references a C++20 concept. |
||
1531 | */ |
||
1532 | CXCursor_RequiresExpr = 154, |
||
1533 | |||
1534 | /** |
||
1535 | * Expression that references a C++20 parenthesized list aggregate |
||
1536 | * initializer. |
||
1537 | */ |
||
1538 | CXCursor_CXXParenListInitExpr = 155, |
||
1539 | |||
1540 | CXCursor_LastExpr = CXCursor_CXXParenListInitExpr, |
||
1541 | |||
1542 | /* Statements */ |
||
1543 | CXCursor_FirstStmt = 200, |
||
1544 | /** |
||
1545 | * A statement whose specific kind is not exposed via this |
||
1546 | * interface. |
||
1547 | * |
||
1548 | * Unexposed statements have the same operations as any other kind of |
||
1549 | * statement; one can extract their location information, spelling, |
||
1550 | * children, etc. However, the specific kind of the statement is not |
||
1551 | * reported. |
||
1552 | */ |
||
1553 | CXCursor_UnexposedStmt = 200, |
||
1554 | |||
1555 | /** A labelled statement in a function. |
||
1556 | * |
||
1557 | * This cursor kind is used to describe the "start_over:" label statement in |
||
1558 | * the following example: |
||
1559 | * |
||
1560 | * \code |
||
1561 | * start_over: |
||
1562 | * ++counter; |
||
1563 | * \endcode |
||
1564 | * |
||
1565 | */ |
||
1566 | CXCursor_LabelStmt = 201, |
||
1567 | |||
1568 | /** A group of statements like { stmt stmt }. |
||
1569 | * |
||
1570 | * This cursor kind is used to describe compound statements, e.g. function |
||
1571 | * bodies. |
||
1572 | */ |
||
1573 | CXCursor_CompoundStmt = 202, |
||
1574 | |||
1575 | /** A case statement. |
||
1576 | */ |
||
1577 | CXCursor_CaseStmt = 203, |
||
1578 | |||
1579 | /** A default statement. |
||
1580 | */ |
||
1581 | CXCursor_DefaultStmt = 204, |
||
1582 | |||
1583 | /** An if statement |
||
1584 | */ |
||
1585 | CXCursor_IfStmt = 205, |
||
1586 | |||
1587 | /** A switch statement. |
||
1588 | */ |
||
1589 | CXCursor_SwitchStmt = 206, |
||
1590 | |||
1591 | /** A while statement. |
||
1592 | */ |
||
1593 | CXCursor_WhileStmt = 207, |
||
1594 | |||
1595 | /** A do statement. |
||
1596 | */ |
||
1597 | CXCursor_DoStmt = 208, |
||
1598 | |||
1599 | /** A for statement. |
||
1600 | */ |
||
1601 | CXCursor_ForStmt = 209, |
||
1602 | |||
1603 | /** A goto statement. |
||
1604 | */ |
||
1605 | CXCursor_GotoStmt = 210, |
||
1606 | |||
1607 | /** An indirect goto statement. |
||
1608 | */ |
||
1609 | CXCursor_IndirectGotoStmt = 211, |
||
1610 | |||
1611 | /** A continue statement. |
||
1612 | */ |
||
1613 | CXCursor_ContinueStmt = 212, |
||
1614 | |||
1615 | /** A break statement. |
||
1616 | */ |
||
1617 | CXCursor_BreakStmt = 213, |
||
1618 | |||
1619 | /** A return statement. |
||
1620 | */ |
||
1621 | CXCursor_ReturnStmt = 214, |
||
1622 | |||
1623 | /** A GCC inline assembly statement extension. |
||
1624 | */ |
||
1625 | CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt = 215, |
||
1626 | CXCursor_AsmStmt = CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt, |
||
1627 | |||
1628 | /** Objective-C's overall \@try-\@catch-\@finally statement. |
||
1629 | */ |
||
1630 | CXCursor_ObjCAtTryStmt = 216, |
||
1631 | |||
1632 | /** Objective-C's \@catch statement. |
||
1633 | */ |
||
1634 | CXCursor_ObjCAtCatchStmt = 217, |
||
1635 | |||
1636 | /** Objective-C's \@finally statement. |
||
1637 | */ |
||
1638 | CXCursor_ObjCAtFinallyStmt = 218, |
||
1639 | |||
1640 | /** Objective-C's \@throw statement. |
||
1641 | */ |
||
1642 | CXCursor_ObjCAtThrowStmt = 219, |
||
1643 | |||
1644 | /** Objective-C's \@synchronized statement. |
||
1645 | */ |
||
1646 | CXCursor_ObjCAtSynchronizedStmt = 220, |
||
1647 | |||
1648 | /** Objective-C's autorelease pool statement. |
||
1649 | */ |
||
1650 | CXCursor_ObjCAutoreleasePoolStmt = 221, |
||
1651 | |||
1652 | /** Objective-C's collection statement. |
||
1653 | */ |
||
1654 | CXCursor_ObjCForCollectionStmt = 222, |
||
1655 | |||
1656 | /** C++'s catch statement. |
||
1657 | */ |
||
1658 | CXCursor_CXXCatchStmt = 223, |
||
1659 | |||
1660 | /** C++'s try statement. |
||
1661 | */ |
||
1662 | CXCursor_CXXTryStmt = 224, |
||
1663 | |||
1664 | /** C++'s for (* : *) statement. |
||
1665 | */ |
||
1666 | CXCursor_CXXForRangeStmt = 225, |
||
1667 | |||
1668 | /** Windows Structured Exception Handling's try statement. |
||
1669 | */ |
||
1670 | CXCursor_SEHTryStmt = 226, |
||
1671 | |||
1672 | /** Windows Structured Exception Handling's except statement. |
||
1673 | */ |
||
1674 | CXCursor_SEHExceptStmt = 227, |
||
1675 | |||
1676 | /** Windows Structured Exception Handling's finally statement. |
||
1677 | */ |
||
1678 | CXCursor_SEHFinallyStmt = 228, |
||
1679 | |||
1680 | /** A MS inline assembly statement extension. |
||
1681 | */ |
||
1682 | CXCursor_MSAsmStmt = 229, |
||
1683 | |||
1684 | /** The null statement ";": C99 6.8.3p3. |
||
1685 | * |
||
1686 | * This cursor kind is used to describe the null statement. |
||
1687 | */ |
||
1688 | CXCursor_NullStmt = 230, |
||
1689 | |||
1690 | /** Adaptor class for mixing declarations with statements and |
||
1691 | * expressions. |
||
1692 | */ |
||
1693 | CXCursor_DeclStmt = 231, |
||
1694 | |||
1695 | /** OpenMP parallel directive. |
||
1696 | */ |
||
1697 | CXCursor_OMPParallelDirective = 232, |
||
1698 | |||
1699 | /** OpenMP SIMD directive. |
||
1700 | */ |
||
1701 | CXCursor_OMPSimdDirective = 233, |
||
1702 | |||
1703 | /** OpenMP for directive. |
||
1704 | */ |
||
1705 | CXCursor_OMPForDirective = 234, |
||
1706 | |||
1707 | /** OpenMP sections directive. |
||
1708 | */ |
||
1709 | CXCursor_OMPSectionsDirective = 235, |
||
1710 | |||
1711 | /** OpenMP section directive. |
||
1712 | */ |
||
1713 | CXCursor_OMPSectionDirective = 236, |
||
1714 | |||
1715 | /** OpenMP single directive. |
||
1716 | */ |
||
1717 | CXCursor_OMPSingleDirective = 237, |
||
1718 | |||
1719 | /** OpenMP parallel for directive. |
||
1720 | */ |
||
1721 | CXCursor_OMPParallelForDirective = 238, |
||
1722 | |||
1723 | /** OpenMP parallel sections directive. |
||
1724 | */ |
||
1725 | CXCursor_OMPParallelSectionsDirective = 239, |
||
1726 | |||
1727 | /** OpenMP task directive. |
||
1728 | */ |
||
1729 | CXCursor_OMPTaskDirective = 240, |
||
1730 | |||
1731 | /** OpenMP master directive. |
||
1732 | */ |
||
1733 | CXCursor_OMPMasterDirective = 241, |
||
1734 | |||
1735 | /** OpenMP critical directive. |
||
1736 | */ |
||
1737 | CXCursor_OMPCriticalDirective = 242, |
||
1738 | |||
1739 | /** OpenMP taskyield directive. |
||
1740 | */ |
||
1741 | CXCursor_OMPTaskyieldDirective = 243, |
||
1742 | |||
1743 | /** OpenMP barrier directive. |
||
1744 | */ |
||
1745 | CXCursor_OMPBarrierDirective = 244, |
||
1746 | |||
1747 | /** OpenMP taskwait directive. |
||
1748 | */ |
||
1749 | CXCursor_OMPTaskwaitDirective = 245, |
||
1750 | |||
1751 | /** OpenMP flush directive. |
||
1752 | */ |
||
1753 | CXCursor_OMPFlushDirective = 246, |
||
1754 | |||
1755 | /** Windows Structured Exception Handling's leave statement. |
||
1756 | */ |
||
1757 | CXCursor_SEHLeaveStmt = 247, |
||
1758 | |||
1759 | /** OpenMP ordered directive. |
||
1760 | */ |
||
1761 | CXCursor_OMPOrderedDirective = 248, |
||
1762 | |||
1763 | /** OpenMP atomic directive. |
||
1764 | */ |
||
1765 | CXCursor_OMPAtomicDirective = 249, |
||
1766 | |||
1767 | /** OpenMP for SIMD directive. |
||
1768 | */ |
||
1769 | CXCursor_OMPForSimdDirective = 250, |
||
1770 | |||
1771 | /** OpenMP parallel for SIMD directive. |
||
1772 | */ |
||
1773 | CXCursor_OMPParallelForSimdDirective = 251, |
||
1774 | |||
1775 | /** OpenMP target directive. |
||
1776 | */ |
||
1777 | CXCursor_OMPTargetDirective = 252, |
||
1778 | |||
1779 | /** OpenMP teams directive. |
||
1780 | */ |
||
1781 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsDirective = 253, |
||
1782 | |||
1783 | /** OpenMP taskgroup directive. |
||
1784 | */ |
||
1785 | CXCursor_OMPTaskgroupDirective = 254, |
||
1786 | |||
1787 | /** OpenMP cancellation point directive. |
||
1788 | */ |
||
1789 | CXCursor_OMPCancellationPointDirective = 255, |
||
1790 | |||
1791 | /** OpenMP cancel directive. |
||
1792 | */ |
||
1793 | CXCursor_OMPCancelDirective = 256, |
||
1794 | |||
1795 | /** OpenMP target data directive. |
||
1796 | */ |
||
1797 | CXCursor_OMPTargetDataDirective = 257, |
||
1798 | |||
1799 | /** OpenMP taskloop directive. |
||
1800 | */ |
||
1801 | CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopDirective = 258, |
||
1802 | |||
1803 | /** OpenMP taskloop simd directive. |
||
1804 | */ |
||
1805 | CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopSimdDirective = 259, |
||
1806 | |||
1807 | /** OpenMP distribute directive. |
||
1808 | */ |
||
1809 | CXCursor_OMPDistributeDirective = 260, |
||
1810 | |||
1811 | /** OpenMP target enter data directive. |
||
1812 | */ |
||
1813 | CXCursor_OMPTargetEnterDataDirective = 261, |
||
1814 | |||
1815 | /** OpenMP target exit data directive. |
||
1816 | */ |
||
1817 | CXCursor_OMPTargetExitDataDirective = 262, |
||
1818 | |||
1819 | /** OpenMP target parallel directive. |
||
1820 | */ |
||
1821 | CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelDirective = 263, |
||
1822 | |||
1823 | /** OpenMP target parallel for directive. |
||
1824 | */ |
||
1825 | CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelForDirective = 264, |
||
1826 | |||
1827 | /** OpenMP target update directive. |
||
1828 | */ |
||
1829 | CXCursor_OMPTargetUpdateDirective = 265, |
||
1830 | |||
1831 | /** OpenMP distribute parallel for directive. |
||
1832 | */ |
||
1833 | CXCursor_OMPDistributeParallelForDirective = 266, |
||
1834 | |||
1835 | /** OpenMP distribute parallel for simd directive. |
||
1836 | */ |
||
1837 | CXCursor_OMPDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 267, |
||
1838 | |||
1839 | /** OpenMP distribute simd directive. |
||
1840 | */ |
||
1841 | CXCursor_OMPDistributeSimdDirective = 268, |
||
1842 | |||
1843 | /** OpenMP target parallel for simd directive. |
||
1844 | */ |
||
1845 | CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelForSimdDirective = 269, |
||
1846 | |||
1847 | /** OpenMP target simd directive. |
||
1848 | */ |
||
1849 | CXCursor_OMPTargetSimdDirective = 270, |
||
1850 | |||
1851 | /** OpenMP teams distribute directive. |
||
1852 | */ |
||
1853 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeDirective = 271, |
||
1854 | |||
1855 | /** OpenMP teams distribute simd directive. |
||
1856 | */ |
||
1857 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeSimdDirective = 272, |
||
1858 | |||
1859 | /** OpenMP teams distribute parallel for simd directive. |
||
1860 | */ |
||
1861 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 273, |
||
1862 | |||
1863 | /** OpenMP teams distribute parallel for directive. |
||
1864 | */ |
||
1865 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeParallelForDirective = 274, |
||
1866 | |||
1867 | /** OpenMP target teams directive. |
||
1868 | */ |
||
1869 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDirective = 275, |
||
1870 | |||
1871 | /** OpenMP target teams distribute directive. |
||
1872 | */ |
||
1873 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeDirective = 276, |
||
1874 | |||
1875 | /** OpenMP target teams distribute parallel for directive. |
||
1876 | */ |
||
1877 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeParallelForDirective = 277, |
||
1878 | |||
1879 | /** OpenMP target teams distribute parallel for simd directive. |
||
1880 | */ |
||
1881 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 278, |
||
1882 | |||
1883 | /** OpenMP target teams distribute simd directive. |
||
1884 | */ |
||
1885 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeSimdDirective = 279, |
||
1886 | |||
1887 | /** C++2a std::bit_cast expression. |
||
1888 | */ |
||
1889 | CXCursor_BuiltinBitCastExpr = 280, |
||
1890 | |||
1891 | /** OpenMP master taskloop directive. |
||
1892 | */ |
||
1893 | CXCursor_OMPMasterTaskLoopDirective = 281, |
||
1894 | |||
1895 | /** OpenMP parallel master taskloop directive. |
||
1896 | */ |
||
1897 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMasterTaskLoopDirective = 282, |
||
1898 | |||
1899 | /** OpenMP master taskloop simd directive. |
||
1900 | */ |
||
1901 | CXCursor_OMPMasterTaskLoopSimdDirective = 283, |
||
1902 | |||
1903 | /** OpenMP parallel master taskloop simd directive. |
||
1904 | */ |
||
1905 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMasterTaskLoopSimdDirective = 284, |
||
1906 | |||
1907 | /** OpenMP parallel master directive. |
||
1908 | */ |
||
1909 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMasterDirective = 285, |
||
1910 | |||
1911 | /** OpenMP depobj directive. |
||
1912 | */ |
||
1913 | CXCursor_OMPDepobjDirective = 286, |
||
1914 | |||
1915 | /** OpenMP scan directive. |
||
1916 | */ |
||
1917 | CXCursor_OMPScanDirective = 287, |
||
1918 | |||
1919 | /** OpenMP tile directive. |
||
1920 | */ |
||
1921 | CXCursor_OMPTileDirective = 288, |
||
1922 | |||
1923 | /** OpenMP canonical loop. |
||
1924 | */ |
||
1925 | CXCursor_OMPCanonicalLoop = 289, |
||
1926 | |||
1927 | /** OpenMP interop directive. |
||
1928 | */ |
||
1929 | CXCursor_OMPInteropDirective = 290, |
||
1930 | |||
1931 | /** OpenMP dispatch directive. |
||
1932 | */ |
||
1933 | CXCursor_OMPDispatchDirective = 291, |
||
1934 | |||
1935 | /** OpenMP masked directive. |
||
1936 | */ |
||
1937 | CXCursor_OMPMaskedDirective = 292, |
||
1938 | |||
1939 | /** OpenMP unroll directive. |
||
1940 | */ |
||
1941 | CXCursor_OMPUnrollDirective = 293, |
||
1942 | |||
1943 | /** OpenMP metadirective directive. |
||
1944 | */ |
||
1945 | CXCursor_OMPMetaDirective = 294, |
||
1946 | |||
1947 | /** OpenMP loop directive. |
||
1948 | */ |
||
1949 | CXCursor_OMPGenericLoopDirective = 295, |
||
1950 | |||
1951 | /** OpenMP teams loop directive. |
||
1952 | */ |
||
1953 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsGenericLoopDirective = 296, |
||
1954 | |||
1955 | /** OpenMP target teams loop directive. |
||
1956 | */ |
||
1957 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsGenericLoopDirective = 297, |
||
1958 | |||
1959 | /** OpenMP parallel loop directive. |
||
1960 | */ |
||
1961 | CXCursor_OMPParallelGenericLoopDirective = 298, |
||
1962 | |||
1963 | /** OpenMP target parallel loop directive. |
||
1964 | */ |
||
1965 | CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelGenericLoopDirective = 299, |
||
1966 | |||
1967 | /** OpenMP parallel masked directive. |
||
1968 | */ |
||
1969 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMaskedDirective = 300, |
||
1970 | |||
1971 | /** OpenMP masked taskloop directive. |
||
1972 | */ |
||
1973 | CXCursor_OMPMaskedTaskLoopDirective = 301, |
||
1974 | |||
1975 | /** OpenMP masked taskloop simd directive. |
||
1976 | */ |
||
1977 | CXCursor_OMPMaskedTaskLoopSimdDirective = 302, |
||
1978 | |||
1979 | /** OpenMP parallel masked taskloop directive. |
||
1980 | */ |
||
1981 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMaskedTaskLoopDirective = 303, |
||
1982 | |||
1983 | /** OpenMP parallel masked taskloop simd directive. |
||
1984 | */ |
||
1985 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMaskedTaskLoopSimdDirective = 304, |
||
1986 | |||
1987 | /** OpenMP error directive. |
||
1988 | */ |
||
1989 | CXCursor_OMPErrorDirective = 305, |
||
1990 | |||
1991 | CXCursor_LastStmt = CXCursor_OMPErrorDirective, |
||
1992 | |||
1993 | /** |
||
1994 | * Cursor that represents the translation unit itself. |
||
1995 | * |
||
1996 | * The translation unit cursor exists primarily to act as the root |
||
1997 | * cursor for traversing the contents of a translation unit. |
||
1998 | */ |
||
1999 | CXCursor_TranslationUnit = 350, |
||
2000 | |||
2001 | /* Attributes */ |
||
2002 | CXCursor_FirstAttr = 400, |
||
2003 | /** |
||
2004 | * An attribute whose specific kind is not exposed via this |
||
2005 | * interface. |
||
2006 | */ |
||
2007 | CXCursor_UnexposedAttr = 400, |
||
2008 | |||
2009 | CXCursor_IBActionAttr = 401, |
||
2010 | CXCursor_IBOutletAttr = 402, |
||
2011 | CXCursor_IBOutletCollectionAttr = 403, |
||
2012 | CXCursor_CXXFinalAttr = 404, |
||
2013 | CXCursor_CXXOverrideAttr = 405, |
||
2014 | CXCursor_AnnotateAttr = 406, |
||
2015 | CXCursor_AsmLabelAttr = 407, |
||
2016 | CXCursor_PackedAttr = 408, |
||
2017 | CXCursor_PureAttr = 409, |
||
2018 | CXCursor_ConstAttr = 410, |
||
2019 | CXCursor_NoDuplicateAttr = 411, |
||
2020 | CXCursor_CUDAConstantAttr = 412, |
||
2021 | CXCursor_CUDADeviceAttr = 413, |
||
2022 | CXCursor_CUDAGlobalAttr = 414, |
||
2023 | CXCursor_CUDAHostAttr = 415, |
||
2024 | CXCursor_CUDASharedAttr = 416, |
||
2025 | CXCursor_VisibilityAttr = 417, |
||
2026 | CXCursor_DLLExport = 418, |
||
2027 | CXCursor_DLLImport = 419, |
||
2028 | CXCursor_NSReturnsRetained = 420, |
||
2029 | CXCursor_NSReturnsNotRetained = 421, |
||
2030 | CXCursor_NSReturnsAutoreleased = 422, |
||
2031 | CXCursor_NSConsumesSelf = 423, |
||
2032 | CXCursor_NSConsumed = 424, |
||
2033 | CXCursor_ObjCException = 425, |
||
2034 | CXCursor_ObjCNSObject = 426, |
||
2035 | CXCursor_ObjCIndependentClass = 427, |
||
2036 | CXCursor_ObjCPreciseLifetime = 428, |
||
2037 | CXCursor_ObjCReturnsInnerPointer = 429, |
||
2038 | CXCursor_ObjCRequiresSuper = 430, |
||
2039 | CXCursor_ObjCRootClass = 431, |
||
2040 | CXCursor_ObjCSubclassingRestricted = 432, |
||
2041 | CXCursor_ObjCExplicitProtocolImpl = 433, |
||
2042 | CXCursor_ObjCDesignatedInitializer = 434, |
||
2043 | CXCursor_ObjCRuntimeVisible = 435, |
||
2044 | CXCursor_ObjCBoxable = 436, |
||
2045 | CXCursor_FlagEnum = 437, |
||
2046 | CXCursor_ConvergentAttr = 438, |
||
2047 | CXCursor_WarnUnusedAttr = 439, |
||
2048 | CXCursor_WarnUnusedResultAttr = 440, |
||
2049 | CXCursor_AlignedAttr = 441, |
||
2050 | CXCursor_LastAttr = CXCursor_AlignedAttr, |
||
2051 | |||
2052 | /* Preprocessing */ |
||
2053 | CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective = 500, |
||
2054 | CXCursor_MacroDefinition = 501, |
||
2055 | CXCursor_MacroExpansion = 502, |
||
2056 | CXCursor_MacroInstantiation = CXCursor_MacroExpansion, |
||
2057 | CXCursor_InclusionDirective = 503, |
||
2058 | CXCursor_FirstPreprocessing = CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective, |
||
2059 | CXCursor_LastPreprocessing = CXCursor_InclusionDirective, |
||
2060 | |||
2061 | /* Extra Declarations */ |
||
2062 | /** |
||
2063 | * A module import declaration. |
||
2064 | */ |
||
2065 | CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl = 600, |
||
2066 | CXCursor_TypeAliasTemplateDecl = 601, |
||
2067 | /** |
||
2068 | * A static_assert or _Static_assert node |
||
2069 | */ |
||
2070 | CXCursor_StaticAssert = 602, |
||
2071 | /** |
||
2072 | * a friend declaration. |
||
2073 | */ |
||
2074 | CXCursor_FriendDecl = 603, |
||
2075 | /** |
||
2076 | * a concept declaration. |
||
2077 | */ |
||
2078 | CXCursor_ConceptDecl = 604, |
||
2079 | |||
2080 | CXCursor_FirstExtraDecl = CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl, |
||
2081 | CXCursor_LastExtraDecl = CXCursor_ConceptDecl, |
||
2082 | |||
2083 | /** |
||
2084 | * A code completion overload candidate. |
||
2085 | */ |
||
2086 | CXCursor_OverloadCandidate = 700 |
||
2087 | }; |
||
2088 | |||
2089 | /** |
||
2090 | * A cursor representing some element in the abstract syntax tree for |
||
2091 | * a translation unit. |
||
2092 | * |
||
2093 | * The cursor abstraction unifies the different kinds of entities in a |
||
2094 | * program--declaration, statements, expressions, references to declarations, |
||
2095 | * etc.--under a single "cursor" abstraction with a common set of operations. |
||
2096 | * Common operation for a cursor include: getting the physical location in |
||
2097 | * a source file where the cursor points, getting the name associated with a |
||
2098 | * cursor, and retrieving cursors for any child nodes of a particular cursor. |
||
2099 | * |
||
2100 | * Cursors can be produced in two specific ways. |
||
2101 | * clang_getTranslationUnitCursor() produces a cursor for a translation unit, |
||
2102 | * from which one can use clang_visitChildren() to explore the rest of the |
||
2103 | * translation unit. clang_getCursor() maps from a physical source location |
||
2104 | * to the entity that resides at that location, allowing one to map from the |
||
2105 | * source code into the AST. |
||
2106 | */ |
||
2107 | typedef struct { |
||
2108 | enum CXCursorKind kind; |
||
2109 | int xdata; |
||
2110 | const void *data[3]; |
||
2111 | } CXCursor; |
||
2112 | |||
2113 | /** |
||
2114 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_MANIP Cursor manipulations |
||
2115 | * |
||
2116 | * @{ |
||
2117 | */ |
||
2118 | |||
2119 | /** |
||
2120 | * Retrieve the NULL cursor, which represents no entity. |
||
2121 | */ |
||
2122 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getNullCursor(void); |
||
2123 | |||
2124 | /** |
||
2125 | * Retrieve the cursor that represents the given translation unit. |
||
2126 | * |
||
2127 | * The translation unit cursor can be used to start traversing the |
||
2128 | * various declarations within the given translation unit. |
||
2129 | */ |
||
2130 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(CXTranslationUnit); |
||
2131 | |||
2132 | /** |
||
2133 | * Determine whether two cursors are equivalent. |
||
2134 | */ |
||
2135 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalCursors(CXCursor, CXCursor); |
||
2136 | |||
2137 | /** |
||
2138 | * Returns non-zero if \p cursor is null. |
||
2139 | */ |
||
2140 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isNull(CXCursor cursor); |
||
2141 | |||
2142 | /** |
||
2143 | * Compute a hash value for the given cursor. |
||
2144 | */ |
||
2145 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_hashCursor(CXCursor); |
||
2146 | |||
2147 | /** |
||
2148 | * Retrieve the kind of the given cursor. |
||
2149 | */ |
||
2150 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getCursorKind(CXCursor); |
||
2151 | |||
2152 | /** |
||
2153 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a declaration. |
||
2154 | */ |
||
2155 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isDeclaration(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
2156 | |||
2157 | /** |
||
2158 | * Determine whether the given declaration is invalid. |
||
2159 | * |
||
2160 | * A declaration is invalid if it could not be parsed successfully. |
||
2161 | * |
||
2162 | * \returns non-zero if the cursor represents a declaration and it is |
||
2163 | * invalid, otherwise NULL. |
||
2164 | */ |
||
2165 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isInvalidDeclaration(CXCursor); |
||
2166 | |||
2167 | /** |
||
2168 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a simple |
||
2169 | * reference. |
||
2170 | * |
||
2171 | * Note that other kinds of cursors (such as expressions) can also refer to |
||
2172 | * other cursors. Use clang_getCursorReferenced() to determine whether a |
||
2173 | * particular cursor refers to another entity. |
||
2174 | */ |
||
2175 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isReference(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
2176 | |||
2177 | /** |
||
2178 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an expression. |
||
2179 | */ |
||
2180 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isExpression(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
2181 | |||
2182 | /** |
||
2183 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a statement. |
||
2184 | */ |
||
2185 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isStatement(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
2186 | |||
2187 | /** |
||
2188 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an attribute. |
||
2189 | */ |
||
2190 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isAttribute(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
2191 | |||
2192 | /** |
||
2193 | * Determine whether the given cursor has any attributes. |
||
2194 | */ |
||
2195 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_hasAttrs(CXCursor C); |
||
2196 | |||
2197 | /** |
||
2198 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an invalid |
||
2199 | * cursor. |
||
2200 | */ |
||
2201 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isInvalid(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
2202 | |||
2203 | /** |
||
2204 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a translation |
||
2205 | * unit. |
||
2206 | */ |
||
2207 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isTranslationUnit(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
2208 | |||
2209 | /*** |
||
2210 | * Determine whether the given cursor represents a preprocessing |
||
2211 | * element, such as a preprocessor directive or macro instantiation. |
||
2212 | */ |
||
2213 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPreprocessing(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
2214 | |||
2215 | /*** |
||
2216 | * Determine whether the given cursor represents a currently |
||
2217 | * unexposed piece of the AST (e.g., CXCursor_UnexposedStmt). |
||
2218 | */ |
||
2219 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isUnexposed(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
2220 | |||
2221 | /** |
||
2222 | * Describe the linkage of the entity referred to by a cursor. |
||
2223 | */ |
||
2224 | enum CXLinkageKind { |
||
2225 | /** This value indicates that no linkage information is available |
||
2226 | * for a provided CXCursor. */ |
||
2227 | CXLinkage_Invalid, |
||
2228 | /** |
||
2229 | * This is the linkage for variables, parameters, and so on that |
||
2230 | * have automatic storage. This covers normal (non-extern) local variables. |
||
2231 | */ |
||
2232 | CXLinkage_NoLinkage, |
||
2233 | /** This is the linkage for static variables and static functions. */ |
||
2234 | CXLinkage_Internal, |
||
2235 | /** This is the linkage for entities with external linkage that live |
||
2236 | * in C++ anonymous namespaces.*/ |
||
2237 | CXLinkage_UniqueExternal, |
||
2238 | /** This is the linkage for entities with true, external linkage. */ |
||
2239 | CXLinkage_External |
||
2240 | }; |
||
2241 | |||
2242 | /** |
||
2243 | * Determine the linkage of the entity referred to by a given cursor. |
||
2244 | */ |
||
2245 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLinkageKind clang_getCursorLinkage(CXCursor cursor); |
||
2246 | |||
2247 | enum CXVisibilityKind { |
||
2248 | /** This value indicates that no visibility information is available |
||
2249 | * for a provided CXCursor. */ |
||
2250 | CXVisibility_Invalid, |
||
2251 | |||
2252 | /** Symbol not seen by the linker. */ |
||
2253 | CXVisibility_Hidden, |
||
2254 | /** Symbol seen by the linker but resolves to a symbol inside this object. */ |
||
2255 | CXVisibility_Protected, |
||
2256 | /** Symbol seen by the linker and acts like a normal symbol. */ |
||
2257 | CXVisibility_Default |
||
2258 | }; |
||
2259 | |||
2260 | /** |
||
2261 | * Describe the visibility of the entity referred to by a cursor. |
||
2262 | * |
||
2263 | * This returns the default visibility if not explicitly specified by |
||
2264 | * a visibility attribute. The default visibility may be changed by |
||
2265 | * commandline arguments. |
||
2266 | * |
||
2267 | * \param cursor The cursor to query. |
||
2268 | * |
||
2269 | * \returns The visibility of the cursor. |
||
2270 | */ |
||
2271 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXVisibilityKind clang_getCursorVisibility(CXCursor cursor); |
||
2272 | |||
2273 | /** |
||
2274 | * Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to, |
||
2275 | * taking the current target platform into account. |
||
2276 | * |
||
2277 | * \param cursor The cursor to query. |
||
2278 | * |
||
2279 | * \returns The availability of the cursor. |
||
2280 | */ |
||
2281 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind |
||
2282 | clang_getCursorAvailability(CXCursor cursor); |
||
2283 | |||
2284 | /** |
||
2285 | * Describes the availability of a given entity on a particular platform, e.g., |
||
2286 | * a particular class might only be available on Mac OS 10.7 or newer. |
||
2287 | */ |
||
2288 | typedef struct CXPlatformAvailability { |
||
2289 | /** |
||
2290 | * A string that describes the platform for which this structure |
||
2291 | * provides availability information. |
||
2292 | * |
||
2293 | * Possible values are "ios" or "macos". |
||
2294 | */ |
||
2295 | CXString Platform; |
||
2296 | /** |
||
2297 | * The version number in which this entity was introduced. |
||
2298 | */ |
||
2299 | CXVersion Introduced; |
||
2300 | /** |
||
2301 | * The version number in which this entity was deprecated (but is |
||
2302 | * still available). |
||
2303 | */ |
||
2304 | CXVersion Deprecated; |
||
2305 | /** |
||
2306 | * The version number in which this entity was obsoleted, and therefore |
||
2307 | * is no longer available. |
||
2308 | */ |
||
2309 | CXVersion Obsoleted; |
||
2310 | /** |
||
2311 | * Whether the entity is unconditionally unavailable on this platform. |
||
2312 | */ |
||
2313 | int Unavailable; |
||
2314 | /** |
||
2315 | * An optional message to provide to a user of this API, e.g., to |
||
2316 | * suggest replacement APIs. |
||
2317 | */ |
||
2318 | CXString Message; |
||
2319 | } CXPlatformAvailability; |
||
2320 | |||
2321 | /** |
||
2322 | * Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to |
||
2323 | * on any platforms for which availability information is known. |
||
2324 | * |
||
2325 | * \param cursor The cursor to query. |
||
2326 | * |
||
2327 | * \param always_deprecated If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the |
||
2328 | * entity is deprecated on all platforms. |
||
2329 | * |
||
2330 | * \param deprecated_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text |
||
2331 | * provided along with the unconditional deprecation of this entity. The client |
||
2332 | * is responsible for deallocating this string. |
||
2333 | * |
||
2334 | * \param always_unavailable If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the |
||
2335 | * entity is unavailable on all platforms. |
||
2336 | * |
||
2337 | * \param unavailable_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text |
||
2338 | * provided along with the unconditional unavailability of this entity. The |
||
2339 | * client is responsible for deallocating this string. |
||
2340 | * |
||
2341 | * \param availability If non-NULL, an array of CXPlatformAvailability instances |
||
2342 | * that will be populated with platform availability information, up to either |
||
2343 | * the number of platforms for which availability information is available (as |
||
2344 | * returned by this function) or \c availability_size, whichever is smaller. |
||
2345 | * |
||
2346 | * \param availability_size The number of elements available in the |
||
2347 | * \c availability array. |
||
2348 | * |
||
2349 | * \returns The number of platforms (N) for which availability information is |
||
2350 | * available (which is unrelated to \c availability_size). |
||
2351 | * |
||
2352 | * Note that the client is responsible for calling |
||
2353 | * \c clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability to free each of the |
||
2354 | * platform-availability structures returned. There are |
||
2355 | * \c min(N, availability_size) such structures. |
||
2356 | */ |
||
2357 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getCursorPlatformAvailability( |
||
2358 | CXCursor cursor, int *always_deprecated, CXString *deprecated_message, |
||
2359 | int *always_unavailable, CXString *unavailable_message, |
||
2360 | CXPlatformAvailability *availability, int availability_size); |
||
2361 | |||
2362 | /** |
||
2363 | * Free the memory associated with a \c CXPlatformAvailability structure. |
||
2364 | */ |
||
2365 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void |
||
2366 | clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability(CXPlatformAvailability *availability); |
||
2367 | |||
2368 | /** |
||
2369 | * If cursor refers to a variable declaration and it has initializer returns |
||
2370 | * cursor referring to the initializer otherwise return null cursor. |
||
2371 | */ |
||
2372 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Cursor_getVarDeclInitializer(CXCursor cursor); |
||
2373 | |||
2374 | /** |
||
2375 | * If cursor refers to a variable declaration that has global storage returns 1. |
||
2376 | * If cursor refers to a variable declaration that doesn't have global storage |
||
2377 | * returns 0. Otherwise returns -1. |
||
2378 | */ |
||
2379 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_hasVarDeclGlobalStorage(CXCursor cursor); |
||
2380 | |||
2381 | /** |
||
2382 | * If cursor refers to a variable declaration that has external storage |
||
2383 | * returns 1. If cursor refers to a variable declaration that doesn't have |
||
2384 | * external storage returns 0. Otherwise returns -1. |
||
2385 | */ |
||
2386 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_hasVarDeclExternalStorage(CXCursor cursor); |
||
2387 | |||
2388 | /** |
||
2389 | * Describe the "language" of the entity referred to by a cursor. |
||
2390 | */ |
||
2391 | enum CXLanguageKind { |
||
2392 | CXLanguage_Invalid = 0, |
||
2393 | CXLanguage_C, |
||
2394 | CXLanguage_ObjC, |
||
2395 | CXLanguage_CPlusPlus |
||
2396 | }; |
||
2397 | |||
2398 | /** |
||
2399 | * Determine the "language" of the entity referred to by a given cursor. |
||
2400 | */ |
||
2401 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLanguageKind clang_getCursorLanguage(CXCursor cursor); |
||
2402 | |||
2403 | /** |
||
2404 | * Describe the "thread-local storage (TLS) kind" of the declaration |
||
2405 | * referred to by a cursor. |
||
2406 | */ |
||
2407 | enum CXTLSKind { CXTLS_None = 0, CXTLS_Dynamic, CXTLS_Static }; |
||
2408 | |||
2409 | /** |
||
2410 | * Determine the "thread-local storage (TLS) kind" of the declaration |
||
2411 | * referred to by a cursor. |
||
2412 | */ |
||
2413 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTLSKind clang_getCursorTLSKind(CXCursor cursor); |
||
2414 | |||
2415 | /** |
||
2416 | * Returns the translation unit that a cursor originated from. |
||
2417 | */ |
||
2418 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_Cursor_getTranslationUnit(CXCursor); |
||
2419 | |||
2420 | /** |
||
2421 | * A fast container representing a set of CXCursors. |
||
2422 | */ |
||
2423 | typedef struct CXCursorSetImpl *CXCursorSet; |
||
2424 | |||
2425 | /** |
||
2426 | * Creates an empty CXCursorSet. |
||
2427 | */ |
||
2428 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursorSet clang_createCXCursorSet(void); |
||
2429 | |||
2430 | /** |
||
2431 | * Disposes a CXCursorSet and releases its associated memory. |
||
2432 | */ |
||
2433 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXCursorSet(CXCursorSet cset); |
||
2434 | |||
2435 | /** |
||
2436 | * Queries a CXCursorSet to see if it contains a specific CXCursor. |
||
2437 | * |
||
2438 | * \returns non-zero if the set contains the specified cursor. |
||
2439 | */ |
||
2440 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_contains(CXCursorSet cset, |
||
2441 | CXCursor cursor); |
||
2442 | |||
2443 | /** |
||
2444 | * Inserts a CXCursor into a CXCursorSet. |
||
2445 | * |
||
2446 | * \returns zero if the CXCursor was already in the set, and non-zero otherwise. |
||
2447 | */ |
||
2448 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_insert(CXCursorSet cset, |
||
2449 | CXCursor cursor); |
||
2450 | |||
2451 | /** |
||
2452 | * Determine the semantic parent of the given cursor. |
||
2453 | * |
||
2454 | * The semantic parent of a cursor is the cursor that semantically contains |
||
2455 | * the given \p cursor. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents |
||
2456 | * are equivalent (the lexical parent is returned by |
||
2457 | * \c clang_getCursorLexicalParent()). They diverge when declarations or |
||
2458 | * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example: |
||
2459 | * |
||
2460 | * \code |
||
2461 | * class C { |
||
2462 | * void f(); |
||
2463 | * }; |
||
2464 | * |
||
2465 | * void C::f() { } |
||
2466 | * \endcode |
||
2467 | * |
||
2468 | * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is |
||
2469 | * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is |
||
2470 | * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this |
||
2471 | * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the |
||
2472 | * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics |
||
2473 | * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the |
||
2474 | * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration, |
||
2475 | * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations |
||
2476 | * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context. |
||
2477 | * |
||
2478 | * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their |
||
2479 | * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C |
||
2480 | * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit. |
||
2481 | * |
||
2482 | * For global declarations, the semantic parent is the translation unit. |
||
2483 | */ |
||
2484 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorSemanticParent(CXCursor cursor); |
||
2485 | |||
2486 | /** |
||
2487 | * Determine the lexical parent of the given cursor. |
||
2488 | * |
||
2489 | * The lexical parent of a cursor is the cursor in which the given \p cursor |
||
2490 | * was actually written. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents |
||
2491 | * are equivalent (the semantic parent is returned by |
||
2492 | * \c clang_getCursorSemanticParent()). They diverge when declarations or |
||
2493 | * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example: |
||
2494 | * |
||
2495 | * \code |
||
2496 | * class C { |
||
2497 | * void f(); |
||
2498 | * }; |
||
2499 | * |
||
2500 | * void C::f() { } |
||
2501 | * \endcode |
||
2502 | * |
||
2503 | * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is |
||
2504 | * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is |
||
2505 | * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this |
||
2506 | * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the |
||
2507 | * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics |
||
2508 | * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the |
||
2509 | * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration, |
||
2510 | * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations |
||
2511 | * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context. |
||
2512 | * |
||
2513 | * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their |
||
2514 | * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C |
||
2515 | * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit. |
||
2516 | * |
||
2517 | * For declarations written in the global scope, the lexical parent is |
||
2518 | * the translation unit. |
||
2519 | */ |
||
2520 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorLexicalParent(CXCursor cursor); |
||
2521 | |||
2522 | /** |
||
2523 | * Determine the set of methods that are overridden by the given |
||
2524 | * method. |
||
2525 | * |
||
2526 | * In both Objective-C and C++, a method (aka virtual member function, |
||
2527 | * in C++) can override a virtual method in a base class. For |
||
2528 | * Objective-C, a method is said to override any method in the class's |
||
2529 | * base class, its protocols, or its categories' protocols, that has the same |
||
2530 | * selector and is of the same kind (class or instance). |
||
2531 | * If no such method exists, the search continues to the class's superclass, |
||
2532 | * its protocols, and its categories, and so on. A method from an Objective-C |
||
2533 | * implementation is considered to override the same methods as its |
||
2534 | * corresponding method in the interface. |
||
2535 | * |
||
2536 | * For C++, a virtual member function overrides any virtual member |
||
2537 | * function with the same signature that occurs in its base |
||
2538 | * classes. With multiple inheritance, a virtual member function can |
||
2539 | * override several virtual member functions coming from different |
||
2540 | * base classes. |
||
2541 | * |
||
2542 | * In all cases, this function determines the immediate overridden |
||
2543 | * method, rather than all of the overridden methods. For example, if |
||
2544 | * a method is originally declared in a class A, then overridden in B |
||
2545 | * (which in inherits from A) and also in C (which inherited from B), |
||
2546 | * then the only overridden method returned from this function when |
||
2547 | * invoked on C's method will be B's method. The client may then |
||
2548 | * invoke this function again, given the previously-found overridden |
||
2549 | * methods, to map out the complete method-override set. |
||
2550 | * |
||
2551 | * \param cursor A cursor representing an Objective-C or C++ |
||
2552 | * method. This routine will compute the set of methods that this |
||
2553 | * method overrides. |
||
2554 | * |
||
2555 | * \param overridden A pointer whose pointee will be replaced with a |
||
2556 | * pointer to an array of cursors, representing the set of overridden |
||
2557 | * methods. If there are no overridden methods, the pointee will be |
||
2558 | * set to NULL. The pointee must be freed via a call to |
||
2559 | * \c clang_disposeOverriddenCursors(). |
||
2560 | * |
||
2561 | * \param num_overridden A pointer to the number of overridden |
||
2562 | * functions, will be set to the number of overridden functions in the |
||
2563 | * array pointed to by \p overridden. |
||
2564 | */ |
||
2565 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getOverriddenCursors(CXCursor cursor, |
||
2566 | CXCursor **overridden, |
||
2567 | unsigned *num_overridden); |
||
2568 | |||
2569 | /** |
||
2570 | * Free the set of overridden cursors returned by \c |
||
2571 | * clang_getOverriddenCursors(). |
||
2572 | */ |
||
2573 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeOverriddenCursors(CXCursor *overridden); |
||
2574 | |||
2575 | /** |
||
2576 | * Retrieve the file that is included by the given inclusion directive |
||
2577 | * cursor. |
||
2578 | */ |
||
2579 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getIncludedFile(CXCursor cursor); |
||
2580 | |||
2581 | /** |
||
2582 | * @} |
||
2583 | */ |
||
2584 | |||
2585 | /** |
||
2586 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_SOURCE Mapping between cursors and source code |
||
2587 | * |
||
2588 | * Cursors represent a location within the Abstract Syntax Tree (AST). These |
||
2589 | * routines help map between cursors and the physical locations where the |
||
2590 | * described entities occur in the source code. The mapping is provided in |
||
2591 | * both directions, so one can map from source code to the AST and back. |
||
2592 | * |
||
2593 | * @{ |
||
2594 | */ |
||
2595 | |||
2596 | /** |
||
2597 | * Map a source location to the cursor that describes the entity at that |
||
2598 | * location in the source code. |
||
2599 | * |
||
2600 | * clang_getCursor() maps an arbitrary source location within a translation |
||
2601 | * unit down to the most specific cursor that describes the entity at that |
||
2602 | * location. For example, given an expression \c x + y, invoking |
||
2603 | * clang_getCursor() with a source location pointing to "x" will return the |
||
2604 | * cursor for "x"; similarly for "y". If the cursor points anywhere between |
||
2605 | * "x" or "y" (e.g., on the + or the whitespace around it), clang_getCursor() |
||
2606 | * will return a cursor referring to the "+" expression. |
||
2607 | * |
||
2608 | * \returns a cursor representing the entity at the given source location, or |
||
2609 | * a NULL cursor if no such entity can be found. |
||
2610 | */ |
||
2611 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursor(CXTranslationUnit, CXSourceLocation); |
||
2612 | |||
2613 | /** |
||
2614 | * Retrieve the physical location of the source constructor referenced |
||
2615 | * by the given cursor. |
||
2616 | * |
||
2617 | * The location of a declaration is typically the location of the name of that |
||
2618 | * declaration, where the name of that declaration would occur if it is |
||
2619 | * unnamed, or some keyword that introduces that particular declaration. |
||
2620 | * The location of a reference is where that reference occurs within the |
||
2621 | * source code. |
||
2622 | */ |
||
2623 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getCursorLocation(CXCursor); |
||
2624 | |||
2625 | /** |
||
2626 | * Retrieve the physical extent of the source construct referenced by |
||
2627 | * the given cursor. |
||
2628 | * |
||
2629 | * The extent of a cursor starts with the file/line/column pointing at the |
||
2630 | * first character within the source construct that the cursor refers to and |
||
2631 | * ends with the last character within that source construct. For a |
||
2632 | * declaration, the extent covers the declaration itself. For a reference, |
||
2633 | * the extent covers the location of the reference (e.g., where the referenced |
||
2634 | * entity was actually used). |
||
2635 | */ |
||
2636 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorExtent(CXCursor); |
||
2637 | |||
2638 | /** |
||
2639 | * @} |
||
2640 | */ |
||
2641 | |||
2642 | /** |
||
2643 | * \defgroup CINDEX_TYPES Type information for CXCursors |
||
2644 | * |
||
2645 | * @{ |
||
2646 | */ |
||
2647 | |||
2648 | /** |
||
2649 | * Describes the kind of type |
||
2650 | */ |
||
2651 | enum CXTypeKind { |
||
2652 | /** |
||
2653 | * Represents an invalid type (e.g., where no type is available). |
||
2654 | */ |
||
2655 | CXType_Invalid = 0, |
||
2656 | |||
2657 | /** |
||
2658 | * A type whose specific kind is not exposed via this |
||
2659 | * interface. |
||
2660 | */ |
||
2661 | CXType_Unexposed = 1, |
||
2662 | |||
2663 | /* Builtin types */ |
||
2664 | CXType_Void = 2, |
||
2665 | CXType_Bool = 3, |
||
2666 | CXType_Char_U = 4, |
||
2667 | CXType_UChar = 5, |
||
2668 | CXType_Char16 = 6, |
||
2669 | CXType_Char32 = 7, |
||
2670 | CXType_UShort = 8, |
||
2671 | CXType_UInt = 9, |
||
2672 | CXType_ULong = 10, |
||
2673 | CXType_ULongLong = 11, |
||
2674 | CXType_UInt128 = 12, |
||
2675 | CXType_Char_S = 13, |
||
2676 | CXType_SChar = 14, |
||
2677 | CXType_WChar = 15, |
||
2678 | CXType_Short = 16, |
||
2679 | CXType_Int = 17, |
||
2680 | CXType_Long = 18, |
||
2681 | CXType_LongLong = 19, |
||
2682 | CXType_Int128 = 20, |
||
2683 | CXType_Float = 21, |
||
2684 | CXType_Double = 22, |
||
2685 | CXType_LongDouble = 23, |
||
2686 | CXType_NullPtr = 24, |
||
2687 | CXType_Overload = 25, |
||
2688 | CXType_Dependent = 26, |
||
2689 | CXType_ObjCId = 27, |
||
2690 | CXType_ObjCClass = 28, |
||
2691 | CXType_ObjCSel = 29, |
||
2692 | CXType_Float128 = 30, |
||
2693 | CXType_Half = 31, |
||
2694 | CXType_Float16 = 32, |
||
2695 | CXType_ShortAccum = 33, |
||
2696 | CXType_Accum = 34, |
||
2697 | CXType_LongAccum = 35, |
||
2698 | CXType_UShortAccum = 36, |
||
2699 | CXType_UAccum = 37, |
||
2700 | CXType_ULongAccum = 38, |
||
2701 | CXType_BFloat16 = 39, |
||
2702 | CXType_Ibm128 = 40, |
||
2703 | CXType_FirstBuiltin = CXType_Void, |
||
2704 | CXType_LastBuiltin = CXType_Ibm128, |
||
2705 | |||
2706 | CXType_Complex = 100, |
||
2707 | CXType_Pointer = 101, |
||
2708 | CXType_BlockPointer = 102, |
||
2709 | CXType_LValueReference = 103, |
||
2710 | CXType_RValueReference = 104, |
||
2711 | CXType_Record = 105, |
||
2712 | CXType_Enum = 106, |
||
2713 | CXType_Typedef = 107, |
||
2714 | CXType_ObjCInterface = 108, |
||
2715 | CXType_ObjCObjectPointer = 109, |
||
2716 | CXType_FunctionNoProto = 110, |
||
2717 | CXType_FunctionProto = 111, |
||
2718 | CXType_ConstantArray = 112, |
||
2719 | CXType_Vector = 113, |
||
2720 | CXType_IncompleteArray = 114, |
||
2721 | CXType_VariableArray = 115, |
||
2722 | CXType_DependentSizedArray = 116, |
||
2723 | CXType_MemberPointer = 117, |
||
2724 | CXType_Auto = 118, |
||
2725 | |||
2726 | /** |
||
2727 | * Represents a type that was referred to using an elaborated type keyword. |
||
2728 | * |
||
2729 | * E.g., struct S, or via a qualified name, e.g., N::M::type, or both. |
||
2730 | */ |
||
2731 | CXType_Elaborated = 119, |
||
2732 | |||
2733 | /* OpenCL PipeType. */ |
||
2734 | CXType_Pipe = 120, |
||
2735 | |||
2736 | /* OpenCL builtin types. */ |
||
2737 | CXType_OCLImage1dRO = 121, |
||
2738 | CXType_OCLImage1dArrayRO = 122, |
||
2739 | CXType_OCLImage1dBufferRO = 123, |
||
2740 | CXType_OCLImage2dRO = 124, |
||
2741 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayRO = 125, |
||
2742 | CXType_OCLImage2dDepthRO = 126, |
||
2743 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayDepthRO = 127, |
||
2744 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAARO = 128, |
||
2745 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAARO = 129, |
||
2746 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAADepthRO = 130, |
||
2747 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAADepthRO = 131, |
||
2748 | CXType_OCLImage3dRO = 132, |
||
2749 | CXType_OCLImage1dWO = 133, |
||
2750 | CXType_OCLImage1dArrayWO = 134, |
||
2751 | CXType_OCLImage1dBufferWO = 135, |
||
2752 | CXType_OCLImage2dWO = 136, |
||
2753 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayWO = 137, |
||
2754 | CXType_OCLImage2dDepthWO = 138, |
||
2755 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayDepthWO = 139, |
||
2756 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAAWO = 140, |
||
2757 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAAWO = 141, |
||
2758 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAADepthWO = 142, |
||
2759 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAADepthWO = 143, |
||
2760 | CXType_OCLImage3dWO = 144, |
||
2761 | CXType_OCLImage1dRW = 145, |
||
2762 | CXType_OCLImage1dArrayRW = 146, |
||
2763 | CXType_OCLImage1dBufferRW = 147, |
||
2764 | CXType_OCLImage2dRW = 148, |
||
2765 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayRW = 149, |
||
2766 | CXType_OCLImage2dDepthRW = 150, |
||
2767 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayDepthRW = 151, |
||
2768 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAARW = 152, |
||
2769 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAARW = 153, |
||
2770 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAADepthRW = 154, |
||
2771 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAADepthRW = 155, |
||
2772 | CXType_OCLImage3dRW = 156, |
||
2773 | CXType_OCLSampler = 157, |
||
2774 | CXType_OCLEvent = 158, |
||
2775 | CXType_OCLQueue = 159, |
||
2776 | CXType_OCLReserveID = 160, |
||
2777 | |||
2778 | CXType_ObjCObject = 161, |
||
2779 | CXType_ObjCTypeParam = 162, |
||
2780 | CXType_Attributed = 163, |
||
2781 | |||
2782 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCMcePayload = 164, |
||
2783 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImePayload = 165, |
||
2784 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCRefPayload = 166, |
||
2785 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCSicPayload = 167, |
||
2786 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCMceResult = 168, |
||
2787 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeResult = 169, |
||
2788 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCRefResult = 170, |
||
2789 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCSicResult = 171, |
||
2790 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeResultSingleRefStreamout = 172, |
||
2791 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeResultDualRefStreamout = 173, |
||
2792 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeSingleRefStreamin = 174, |
||
2793 | |||
2794 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeDualRefStreamin = 175, |
||
2795 | |||
2796 | CXType_ExtVector = 176, |
||
2797 | CXType_Atomic = 177, |
||
2798 | CXType_BTFTagAttributed = 178 |
||
2799 | }; |
||
2800 | |||
2801 | /** |
||
2802 | * Describes the calling convention of a function type |
||
2803 | */ |
||
2804 | enum CXCallingConv { |
||
2805 | CXCallingConv_Default = 0, |
||
2806 | CXCallingConv_C = 1, |
||
2807 | CXCallingConv_X86StdCall = 2, |
||
2808 | CXCallingConv_X86FastCall = 3, |
||
2809 | CXCallingConv_X86ThisCall = 4, |
||
2810 | CXCallingConv_X86Pascal = 5, |
||
2811 | CXCallingConv_AAPCS = 6, |
||
2812 | CXCallingConv_AAPCS_VFP = 7, |
||
2813 | CXCallingConv_X86RegCall = 8, |
||
2814 | CXCallingConv_IntelOclBicc = 9, |
||
2815 | CXCallingConv_Win64 = 10, |
||
2816 | /* Alias for compatibility with older versions of API. */ |
||
2817 | CXCallingConv_X86_64Win64 = CXCallingConv_Win64, |
||
2818 | CXCallingConv_X86_64SysV = 11, |
||
2819 | CXCallingConv_X86VectorCall = 12, |
||
2820 | CXCallingConv_Swift = 13, |
||
2821 | CXCallingConv_PreserveMost = 14, |
||
2822 | CXCallingConv_PreserveAll = 15, |
||
2823 | CXCallingConv_AArch64VectorCall = 16, |
||
2824 | CXCallingConv_SwiftAsync = 17, |
||
2825 | CXCallingConv_AArch64SVEPCS = 18, |
||
2826 | |||
2827 | CXCallingConv_Invalid = 100, |
||
2828 | CXCallingConv_Unexposed = 200 |
||
2829 | }; |
||
2830 | |||
2831 | /** |
||
2832 | * The type of an element in the abstract syntax tree. |
||
2833 | * |
||
2834 | */ |
||
2835 | typedef struct { |
||
2836 | enum CXTypeKind kind; |
||
2837 | void *data[2]; |
||
2838 | } CXType; |
||
2839 | |||
2840 | /** |
||
2841 | * Retrieve the type of a CXCursor (if any). |
||
2842 | */ |
||
2843 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorType(CXCursor C); |
||
2844 | |||
2845 | /** |
||
2846 | * Pretty-print the underlying type using the rules of the |
||
2847 | * language of the translation unit from which it came. |
||
2848 | * |
||
2849 | * If the type is invalid, an empty string is returned. |
||
2850 | */ |
||
2851 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeSpelling(CXType CT); |
||
2852 | |||
2853 | /** |
||
2854 | * Retrieve the underlying type of a typedef declaration. |
||
2855 | * |
||
2856 | * If the cursor does not reference a typedef declaration, an invalid type is |
||
2857 | * returned. |
||
2858 | */ |
||
2859 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getTypedefDeclUnderlyingType(CXCursor C); |
||
2860 | |||
2861 | /** |
||
2862 | * Retrieve the integer type of an enum declaration. |
||
2863 | * |
||
2864 | * If the cursor does not reference an enum declaration, an invalid type is |
||
2865 | * returned. |
||
2866 | */ |
||
2867 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getEnumDeclIntegerType(CXCursor C); |
||
2868 | |||
2869 | /** |
||
2870 | * Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as a signed |
||
2871 | * long long. |
||
2872 | * |
||
2873 | * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, LLONG_MIN is |
||
2874 | * returned. Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of |
||
2875 | * the cursor must be verified before calling this function. |
||
2876 | */ |
||
2877 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclValue(CXCursor C); |
||
2878 | |||
2879 | /** |
||
2880 | * Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as an unsigned |
||
2881 | * long long. |
||
2882 | * |
||
2883 | * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, ULLONG_MAX is |
||
2884 | * returned. Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of |
||
2885 | * the cursor must be verified before calling this function. |
||
2886 | */ |
||
2887 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long |
||
2888 | clang_getEnumConstantDeclUnsignedValue(CXCursor C); |
||
2889 | |||
2890 | /** |
||
2891 | * Retrieve the bit width of a bit field declaration as an integer. |
||
2892 | * |
||
2893 | * If a cursor that is not a bit field declaration is passed in, -1 is returned. |
||
2894 | */ |
||
2895 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFieldDeclBitWidth(CXCursor C); |
||
2896 | |||
2897 | /** |
||
2898 | * Retrieve the number of non-variadic arguments associated with a given |
||
2899 | * cursor. |
||
2900 | * |
||
2901 | * The number of arguments can be determined for calls as well as for |
||
2902 | * declarations of functions or methods. For other cursors -1 is returned. |
||
2903 | */ |
||
2904 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumArguments(CXCursor C); |
||
2905 | |||
2906 | /** |
||
2907 | * Retrieve the argument cursor of a function or method. |
||
2908 | * |
||
2909 | * The argument cursor can be determined for calls as well as for declarations |
||
2910 | * of functions or methods. For other cursors and for invalid indices, an |
||
2911 | * invalid cursor is returned. |
||
2912 | */ |
||
2913 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Cursor_getArgument(CXCursor C, unsigned i); |
||
2914 | |||
2915 | /** |
||
2916 | * Describes the kind of a template argument. |
||
2917 | * |
||
2918 | * See the definition of llvm::clang::TemplateArgument::ArgKind for full |
||
2919 | * element descriptions. |
||
2920 | */ |
||
2921 | enum CXTemplateArgumentKind { |
||
2922 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Null, |
||
2923 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Type, |
||
2924 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Declaration, |
||
2925 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_NullPtr, |
||
2926 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Integral, |
||
2927 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Template, |
||
2928 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_TemplateExpansion, |
||
2929 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Expression, |
||
2930 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Pack, |
||
2931 | /* Indicates an error case, preventing the kind from being deduced. */ |
||
2932 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Invalid |
||
2933 | }; |
||
2934 | |||
2935 | /** |
||
2936 | * Returns the number of template args of a function, struct, or class decl |
||
2937 | * representing a template specialization. |
||
2938 | * |
||
2939 | * If the argument cursor cannot be converted into a template function |
||
2940 | * declaration, -1 is returned. |
||
2941 | * |
||
2942 | * For example, for the following declaration and specialization: |
||
2943 | * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool> |
||
2944 | * void foo() { ... } |
||
2945 | * |
||
2946 | * template <> |
||
2947 | * void foo<float, -7, true>(); |
||
2948 | * |
||
2949 | * The value 3 would be returned from this call. |
||
2950 | */ |
||
2951 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumTemplateArguments(CXCursor C); |
||
2952 | |||
2953 | /** |
||
2954 | * Retrieve the kind of the I'th template argument of the CXCursor C. |
||
2955 | * |
||
2956 | * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl, StructDecl, or |
||
2957 | * ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization, an invalid template argument kind is |
||
2958 | * returned. |
||
2959 | * |
||
2960 | * For example, for the following declaration and specialization: |
||
2961 | * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool> |
||
2962 | * void foo() { ... } |
||
2963 | * |
||
2964 | * template <> |
||
2965 | * void foo<float, -7, true>(); |
||
2966 | * |
||
2967 | * For I = 0, 1, and 2, Type, Integral, and Integral will be returned, |
||
2968 | * respectively. |
||
2969 | */ |
||
2970 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTemplateArgumentKind |
||
2971 | clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentKind(CXCursor C, unsigned I); |
||
2972 | |||
2973 | /** |
||
2974 | * Retrieve a CXType representing the type of a TemplateArgument of a |
||
2975 | * function decl representing a template specialization. |
||
2976 | * |
||
2977 | * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl, StructDecl, |
||
2978 | * ClassDecl or ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization whose I'th template argument |
||
2979 | * has a kind of CXTemplateArgKind_Integral, an invalid type is returned. |
||
2980 | * |
||
2981 | * For example, for the following declaration and specialization: |
||
2982 | * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool> |
||
2983 | * void foo() { ... } |
||
2984 | * |
||
2985 | * template <> |
||
2986 | * void foo<float, -7, true>(); |
||
2987 | * |
||
2988 | * If called with I = 0, "float", will be returned. |
||
2989 | * Invalid types will be returned for I == 1 or 2. |
||
2990 | */ |
||
2991 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentType(CXCursor C, |
||
2992 | unsigned I); |
||
2993 | |||
2994 | /** |
||
2995 | * Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function |
||
2996 | * decl representing a template specialization) as a signed long long. |
||
2997 | * |
||
2998 | * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a |
||
2999 | * FunctionDecl, StructDecl, ClassDecl or ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization |
||
3000 | * whose I'th template argument is not an integral value. |
||
3001 | * |
||
3002 | * For example, for the following declaration and specialization: |
||
3003 | * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool> |
||
3004 | * void foo() { ... } |
||
3005 | * |
||
3006 | * template <> |
||
3007 | * void foo<float, -7, true>(); |
||
3008 | * |
||
3009 | * If called with I = 1 or 2, -7 or true will be returned, respectively. |
||
3010 | * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined. |
||
3011 | */ |
||
3012 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentValue(CXCursor C, |
||
3013 | unsigned I); |
||
3014 | |||
3015 | /** |
||
3016 | * Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function |
||
3017 | * decl representing a template specialization) as an unsigned long long. |
||
3018 | * |
||
3019 | * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a |
||
3020 | * FunctionDecl, StructDecl, ClassDecl or ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization or |
||
3021 | * whose I'th template argument is not an integral value. |
||
3022 | * |
||
3023 | * For example, for the following declaration and specialization: |
||
3024 | * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool> |
||
3025 | * void foo() { ... } |
||
3026 | * |
||
3027 | * template <> |
||
3028 | * void foo<float, 2147483649, true>(); |
||
3029 | * |
||
3030 | * If called with I = 1 or 2, 2147483649 or true will be returned, respectively. |
||
3031 | * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined. |
||
3032 | */ |
||
3033 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long |
||
3034 | clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentUnsignedValue(CXCursor C, unsigned I); |
||
3035 | |||
3036 | /** |
||
3037 | * Determine whether two CXTypes represent the same type. |
||
3038 | * |
||
3039 | * \returns non-zero if the CXTypes represent the same type and |
||
3040 | * zero otherwise. |
||
3041 | */ |
||
3042 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalTypes(CXType A, CXType B); |
||
3043 | |||
3044 | /** |
||
3045 | * Return the canonical type for a CXType. |
||
3046 | * |
||
3047 | * Clang's type system explicitly models typedefs and all the ways |
||
3048 | * a specific type can be represented. The canonical type is the underlying |
||
3049 | * type with all the "sugar" removed. For example, if 'T' is a typedef |
||
3050 | * for 'int', the canonical type for 'T' would be 'int'. |
||
3051 | */ |
||
3052 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCanonicalType(CXType T); |
||
3053 | |||
3054 | /** |
||
3055 | * Determine whether a CXType has the "const" qualifier set, |
||
3056 | * without looking through typedefs that may have added "const" at a |
||
3057 | * different level. |
||
3058 | */ |
||
3059 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isConstQualifiedType(CXType T); |
||
3060 | |||
3061 | /** |
||
3062 | * Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is |
||
3063 | * function like. |
||
3064 | */ |
||
3065 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroFunctionLike(CXCursor C); |
||
3066 | |||
3067 | /** |
||
3068 | * Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is a |
||
3069 | * builtin one. |
||
3070 | */ |
||
3071 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroBuiltin(CXCursor C); |
||
3072 | |||
3073 | /** |
||
3074 | * Determine whether a CXCursor that is a function declaration, is an |
||
3075 | * inline declaration. |
||
3076 | */ |
||
3077 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isFunctionInlined(CXCursor C); |
||
3078 | |||
3079 | /** |
||
3080 | * Determine whether a CXType has the "volatile" qualifier set, |
||
3081 | * without looking through typedefs that may have added "volatile" at |
||
3082 | * a different level. |
||
3083 | */ |
||
3084 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVolatileQualifiedType(CXType T); |
||
3085 | |||
3086 | /** |
||
3087 | * Determine whether a CXType has the "restrict" qualifier set, |
||
3088 | * without looking through typedefs that may have added "restrict" at a |
||
3089 | * different level. |
||
3090 | */ |
||
3091 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isRestrictQualifiedType(CXType T); |
||
3092 | |||
3093 | /** |
||
3094 | * Returns the address space of the given type. |
||
3095 | */ |
||
3096 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getAddressSpace(CXType T); |
||
3097 | |||
3098 | /** |
||
3099 | * Returns the typedef name of the given type. |
||
3100 | */ |
||
3101 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypedefName(CXType CT); |
||
3102 | |||
3103 | /** |
||
3104 | * For pointer types, returns the type of the pointee. |
||
3105 | */ |
||
3106 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getPointeeType(CXType T); |
||
3107 | |||
3108 | /** |
||
3109 | * Retrieve the unqualified variant of the given type, removing as |
||
3110 | * little sugar as possible. |
||
3111 | * |
||
3112 | * For example, given the following series of typedefs: |
||
3113 | * |
||
3114 | * \code |
||
3115 | * typedef int Integer; |
||
3116 | * typedef const Integer CInteger; |
||
3117 | * typedef CInteger DifferenceType; |
||
3118 | * \endcode |
||
3119 | * |
||
3120 | * Executing \c clang_getUnqualifiedType() on a \c CXType that |
||
3121 | * represents \c DifferenceType, will desugar to a type representing |
||
3122 | * \c Integer, that has no qualifiers. |
||
3123 | * |
||
3124 | * And, executing \c clang_getUnqualifiedType() on the type of the |
||
3125 | * first argument of the following function declaration: |
||
3126 | * |
||
3127 | * \code |
||
3128 | * void foo(const int); |
||
3129 | * \endcode |
||
3130 | * |
||
3131 | * Will return a type representing \c int, removing the \c const |
||
3132 | * qualifier. |
||
3133 | * |
||
3134 | * Sugar over array types is not desugared. |
||
3135 | * |
||
3136 | * A type can be checked for qualifiers with \c |
||
3137 | * clang_isConstQualifiedType(), \c clang_isVolatileQualifiedType() |
||
3138 | * and \c clang_isRestrictQualifiedType(). |
||
3139 | * |
||
3140 | * A type that resulted from a call to \c clang_getUnqualifiedType |
||
3141 | * will return \c false for all of the above calls. |
||
3142 | */ |
||
3143 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getUnqualifiedType(CXType CT); |
||
3144 | |||
3145 | /** |
||
3146 | * For reference types (e.g., "const int&"), returns the type that the |
||
3147 | * reference refers to (e.g "const int"). |
||
3148 | * |
||
3149 | * Otherwise, returns the type itself. |
||
3150 | * |
||
3151 | * A type that has kind \c CXType_LValueReference or |
||
3152 | * \c CXType_RValueReference is a reference type. |
||
3153 | */ |
||
3154 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getNonReferenceType(CXType CT); |
||
3155 | |||
3156 | /** |
||
3157 | * Return the cursor for the declaration of the given type. |
||
3158 | */ |
||
3159 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTypeDeclaration(CXType T); |
||
3160 | |||
3161 | /** |
||
3162 | * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified declaration. |
||
3163 | */ |
||
3164 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDeclObjCTypeEncoding(CXCursor C); |
||
3165 | |||
3166 | /** |
||
3167 | * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified CXType. |
||
3168 | */ |
||
3169 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Type_getObjCEncoding(CXType type); |
||
3170 | |||
3171 | /** |
||
3172 | * Retrieve the spelling of a given CXTypeKind. |
||
3173 | */ |
||
3174 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeKindSpelling(enum CXTypeKind K); |
||
3175 | |||
3176 | /** |
||
3177 | * Retrieve the calling convention associated with a function type. |
||
3178 | * |
||
3179 | * If a non-function type is passed in, CXCallingConv_Invalid is returned. |
||
3180 | */ |
||
3181 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCallingConv clang_getFunctionTypeCallingConv(CXType T); |
||
3182 | |||
3183 | /** |
||
3184 | * Retrieve the return type associated with a function type. |
||
3185 | * |
||
3186 | * If a non-function type is passed in, an invalid type is returned. |
||
3187 | */ |
||
3188 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getResultType(CXType T); |
||
3189 | |||
3190 | /** |
||
3191 | * Retrieve the exception specification type associated with a function type. |
||
3192 | * This is a value of type CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind. |
||
3193 | * |
||
3194 | * If a non-function type is passed in, an error code of -1 is returned. |
||
3195 | */ |
||
3196 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getExceptionSpecificationType(CXType T); |
||
3197 | |||
3198 | /** |
||
3199 | * Retrieve the number of non-variadic parameters associated with a |
||
3200 | * function type. |
||
3201 | * |
||
3202 | * If a non-function type is passed in, -1 is returned. |
||
3203 | */ |
||
3204 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getNumArgTypes(CXType T); |
||
3205 | |||
3206 | /** |
||
3207 | * Retrieve the type of a parameter of a function type. |
||
3208 | * |
||
3209 | * If a non-function type is passed in or the function does not have enough |
||
3210 | * parameters, an invalid type is returned. |
||
3211 | */ |
||
3212 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArgType(CXType T, unsigned i); |
||
3213 | |||
3214 | /** |
||
3215 | * Retrieves the base type of the ObjCObjectType. |
||
3216 | * |
||
3217 | * If the type is not an ObjC object, an invalid type is returned. |
||
3218 | */ |
||
3219 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getObjCObjectBaseType(CXType T); |
||
3220 | |||
3221 | /** |
||
3222 | * Retrieve the number of protocol references associated with an ObjC object/id. |
||
3223 | * |
||
3224 | * If the type is not an ObjC object, 0 is returned. |
||
3225 | */ |
||
3226 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_getNumObjCProtocolRefs(CXType T); |
||
3227 | |||
3228 | /** |
||
3229 | * Retrieve the decl for a protocol reference for an ObjC object/id. |
||
3230 | * |
||
3231 | * If the type is not an ObjC object or there are not enough protocol |
||
3232 | * references, an invalid cursor is returned. |
||
3233 | */ |
||
3234 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Type_getObjCProtocolDecl(CXType T, unsigned i); |
||
3235 | |||
3236 | /** |
||
3237 | * Retrieve the number of type arguments associated with an ObjC object. |
||
3238 | * |
||
3239 | * If the type is not an ObjC object, 0 is returned. |
||
3240 | */ |
||
3241 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_getNumObjCTypeArgs(CXType T); |
||
3242 | |||
3243 | /** |
||
3244 | * Retrieve a type argument associated with an ObjC object. |
||
3245 | * |
||
3246 | * If the type is not an ObjC or the index is not valid, |
||
3247 | * an invalid type is returned. |
||
3248 | */ |
||
3249 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getObjCTypeArg(CXType T, unsigned i); |
||
3250 | |||
3251 | /** |
||
3252 | * Return 1 if the CXType is a variadic function type, and 0 otherwise. |
||
3253 | */ |
||
3254 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isFunctionTypeVariadic(CXType T); |
||
3255 | |||
3256 | /** |
||
3257 | * Retrieve the return type associated with a given cursor. |
||
3258 | * |
||
3259 | * This only returns a valid type if the cursor refers to a function or method. |
||
3260 | */ |
||
3261 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorResultType(CXCursor C); |
||
3262 | |||
3263 | /** |
||
3264 | * Retrieve the exception specification type associated with a given cursor. |
||
3265 | * This is a value of type CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind. |
||
3266 | * |
||
3267 | * This only returns a valid result if the cursor refers to a function or |
||
3268 | * method. |
||
3269 | */ |
||
3270 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getCursorExceptionSpecificationType(CXCursor C); |
||
3271 | |||
3272 | /** |
||
3273 | * Return 1 if the CXType is a POD (plain old data) type, and 0 |
||
3274 | * otherwise. |
||
3275 | */ |
||
3276 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPODType(CXType T); |
||
3277 | |||
3278 | /** |
||
3279 | * Return the element type of an array, complex, or vector type. |
||
3280 | * |
||
3281 | * If a type is passed in that is not an array, complex, or vector type, |
||
3282 | * an invalid type is returned. |
||
3283 | */ |
||
3284 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getElementType(CXType T); |
||
3285 | |||
3286 | /** |
||
3287 | * Return the number of elements of an array or vector type. |
||
3288 | * |
||
3289 | * If a type is passed in that is not an array or vector type, |
||
3290 | * -1 is returned. |
||
3291 | */ |
||
3292 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getNumElements(CXType T); |
||
3293 | |||
3294 | /** |
||
3295 | * Return the element type of an array type. |
||
3296 | * |
||
3297 | * If a non-array type is passed in, an invalid type is returned. |
||
3298 | */ |
||
3299 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArrayElementType(CXType T); |
||
3300 | |||
3301 | /** |
||
3302 | * Return the array size of a constant array. |
||
3303 | * |
||
3304 | * If a non-array type is passed in, -1 is returned. |
||
3305 | */ |
||
3306 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getArraySize(CXType T); |
||
3307 | |||
3308 | /** |
||
3309 | * Retrieve the type named by the qualified-id. |
||
3310 | * |
||
3311 | * If a non-elaborated type is passed in, an invalid type is returned. |
||
3312 | */ |
||
3313 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getNamedType(CXType T); |
||
3314 | |||
3315 | /** |
||
3316 | * Determine if a typedef is 'transparent' tag. |
||
3317 | * |
||
3318 | * A typedef is considered 'transparent' if it shares a name and spelling |
||
3319 | * location with its underlying tag type, as is the case with the NS_ENUM macro. |
||
3320 | * |
||
3321 | * \returns non-zero if transparent and zero otherwise. |
||
3322 | */ |
||
3323 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_isTransparentTagTypedef(CXType T); |
||
3324 | |||
3325 | enum CXTypeNullabilityKind { |
||
3326 | /** |
||
3327 | * Values of this type can never be null. |
||
3328 | */ |
||
3329 | CXTypeNullability_NonNull = 0, |
||
3330 | /** |
||
3331 | * Values of this type can be null. |
||
3332 | */ |
||
3333 | CXTypeNullability_Nullable = 1, |
||
3334 | /** |
||
3335 | * Whether values of this type can be null is (explicitly) |
||
3336 | * unspecified. This captures a (fairly rare) case where we |
||
3337 | * can't conclude anything about the nullability of the type even |
||
3338 | * though it has been considered. |
||
3339 | */ |
||
3340 | CXTypeNullability_Unspecified = 2, |
||
3341 | /** |
||
3342 | * Nullability is not applicable to this type. |
||
3343 | */ |
||
3344 | CXTypeNullability_Invalid = 3, |
||
3345 | |||
3346 | /** |
||
3347 | * Generally behaves like Nullable, except when used in a block parameter that |
||
3348 | * was imported into a swift async method. There, swift will assume that the |
||
3349 | * parameter can get null even if no error occurred. _Nullable parameters are |
||
3350 | * assumed to only get null on error. |
||
3351 | */ |
||
3352 | CXTypeNullability_NullableResult = 4 |
||
3353 | }; |
||
3354 | |||
3355 | /** |
||
3356 | * Retrieve the nullability kind of a pointer type. |
||
3357 | */ |
||
3358 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTypeNullabilityKind clang_Type_getNullability(CXType T); |
||
3359 | |||
3360 | /** |
||
3361 | * List the possible error codes for \c clang_Type_getSizeOf, |
||
3362 | * \c clang_Type_getAlignOf, \c clang_Type_getOffsetOf and |
||
3363 | * \c clang_Cursor_getOffsetOf. |
||
3364 | * |
||
3365 | * A value of this enumeration type can be returned if the target type is not |
||
3366 | * a valid argument to sizeof, alignof or offsetof. |
||
3367 | */ |
||
3368 | enum CXTypeLayoutError { |
||
3369 | /** |
||
3370 | * Type is of kind CXType_Invalid. |
||
3371 | */ |
||
3372 | CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid = -1, |
||
3373 | /** |
||
3374 | * The type is an incomplete Type. |
||
3375 | */ |
||
3376 | CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete = -2, |
||
3377 | /** |
||
3378 | * The type is a dependent Type. |
||
3379 | */ |
||
3380 | CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent = -3, |
||
3381 | /** |
||
3382 | * The type is not a constant size type. |
||
3383 | */ |
||
3384 | CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize = -4, |
||
3385 | /** |
||
3386 | * The Field name is not valid for this record. |
||
3387 | */ |
||
3388 | CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName = -5, |
||
3389 | /** |
||
3390 | * The type is undeduced. |
||
3391 | */ |
||
3392 | CXTypeLayoutError_Undeduced = -6 |
||
3393 | }; |
||
3394 | |||
3395 | /** |
||
3396 | * Return the alignment of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.alignof] |
||
3397 | * standard. |
||
3398 | * |
||
3399 | * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned. |
||
3400 | * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete |
||
3401 | * is returned. |
||
3402 | * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is |
||
3403 | * returned. |
||
3404 | * If the type declaration is not a constant size type, |
||
3405 | * CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize is returned. |
||
3406 | */ |
||
3407 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getAlignOf(CXType T); |
||
3408 | |||
3409 | /** |
||
3410 | * Return the class type of an member pointer type. |
||
3411 | * |
||
3412 | * If a non-member-pointer type is passed in, an invalid type is returned. |
||
3413 | */ |
||
3414 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getClassType(CXType T); |
||
3415 | |||
3416 | /** |
||
3417 | * Return the size of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.sizeof] standard. |
||
3418 | * |
||
3419 | * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned. |
||
3420 | * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete |
||
3421 | * is returned. |
||
3422 | * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is |
||
3423 | * returned. |
||
3424 | */ |
||
3425 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getSizeOf(CXType T); |
||
3426 | |||
3427 | /** |
||
3428 | * Return the offset of a field named S in a record of type T in bits |
||
3429 | * as it would be returned by __offsetof__ as per C++11[18.2p4] |
||
3430 | * |
||
3431 | * If the cursor is not a record field declaration, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid |
||
3432 | * is returned. |
||
3433 | * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type, |
||
3434 | * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned. |
||
3435 | * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type, |
||
3436 | * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned. |
||
3437 | * If the field's name S is not found, |
||
3438 | * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned. |
||
3439 | */ |
||
3440 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getOffsetOf(CXType T, const char *S); |
||
3441 | |||
3442 | /** |
||
3443 | * Return the type that was modified by this attributed type. |
||
3444 | * |
||
3445 | * If the type is not an attributed type, an invalid type is returned. |
||
3446 | */ |
||
3447 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getModifiedType(CXType T); |
||
3448 | |||
3449 | /** |
||
3450 | * Gets the type contained by this atomic type. |
||
3451 | * |
||
3452 | * If a non-atomic type is passed in, an invalid type is returned. |
||
3453 | */ |
||
3454 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getValueType(CXType CT); |
||
3455 | |||
3456 | /** |
||
3457 | * Return the offset of the field represented by the Cursor. |
||
3458 | * |
||
3459 | * If the cursor is not a field declaration, -1 is returned. |
||
3460 | * If the cursor semantic parent is not a record field declaration, |
||
3461 | * CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned. |
||
3462 | * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type, |
||
3463 | * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned. |
||
3464 | * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type, |
||
3465 | * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned. |
||
3466 | * If the field's name S is not found, |
||
3467 | * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned. |
||
3468 | */ |
||
3469 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getOffsetOfField(CXCursor C); |
||
3470 | |||
3471 | /** |
||
3472 | * Determine whether the given cursor represents an anonymous |
||
3473 | * tag or namespace |
||
3474 | */ |
||
3475 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isAnonymous(CXCursor C); |
||
3476 | |||
3477 | /** |
||
3478 | * Determine whether the given cursor represents an anonymous record |
||
3479 | * declaration. |
||
3480 | */ |
||
3481 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isAnonymousRecordDecl(CXCursor C); |
||
3482 | |||
3483 | /** |
||
3484 | * Determine whether the given cursor represents an inline namespace |
||
3485 | * declaration. |
||
3486 | */ |
||
3487 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isInlineNamespace(CXCursor C); |
||
3488 | |||
3489 | enum CXRefQualifierKind { |
||
3490 | /** No ref-qualifier was provided. */ |
||
3491 | CXRefQualifier_None = 0, |
||
3492 | /** An lvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &). */ |
||
3493 | CXRefQualifier_LValue, |
||
3494 | /** An rvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &&). */ |
||
3495 | CXRefQualifier_RValue |
||
3496 | }; |
||
3497 | |||
3498 | /** |
||
3499 | * Returns the number of template arguments for given template |
||
3500 | * specialization, or -1 if type \c T is not a template specialization. |
||
3501 | */ |
||
3502 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Type_getNumTemplateArguments(CXType T); |
||
3503 | |||
3504 | /** |
||
3505 | * Returns the type template argument of a template class specialization |
||
3506 | * at given index. |
||
3507 | * |
||
3508 | * This function only returns template type arguments and does not handle |
||
3509 | * template template arguments or variadic packs. |
||
3510 | */ |
||
3511 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getTemplateArgumentAsType(CXType T, |
||
3512 | unsigned i); |
||
3513 | |||
3514 | /** |
||
3515 | * Retrieve the ref-qualifier kind of a function or method. |
||
3516 | * |
||
3517 | * The ref-qualifier is returned for C++ functions or methods. For other types |
||
3518 | * or non-C++ declarations, CXRefQualifier_None is returned. |
||
3519 | */ |
||
3520 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXRefQualifierKind clang_Type_getCXXRefQualifier(CXType T); |
||
3521 | |||
3522 | /** |
||
3523 | * Returns non-zero if the cursor specifies a Record member that is a |
||
3524 | * bitfield. |
||
3525 | */ |
||
3526 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isBitField(CXCursor C); |
||
3527 | |||
3528 | /** |
||
3529 | * Returns 1 if the base class specified by the cursor with kind |
||
3530 | * CX_CXXBaseSpecifier is virtual. |
||
3531 | */ |
||
3532 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVirtualBase(CXCursor); |
||
3533 | |||
3534 | /** |
||
3535 | * Represents the C++ access control level to a base class for a |
||
3536 | * cursor with kind CX_CXXBaseSpecifier. |
||
3537 | */ |
||
3538 | enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier { |
||
3539 | CX_CXXInvalidAccessSpecifier, |
||
3540 | CX_CXXPublic, |
||
3541 | CX_CXXProtected, |
||
3542 | CX_CXXPrivate |
||
3543 | }; |
||
3544 | |||
3545 | /** |
||
3546 | * Returns the access control level for the referenced object. |
||
3547 | * |
||
3548 | * If the cursor refers to a C++ declaration, its access control level within |
||
3549 | * its parent scope is returned. Otherwise, if the cursor refers to a base |
||
3550 | * specifier or access specifier, the specifier itself is returned. |
||
3551 | */ |
||
3552 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier clang_getCXXAccessSpecifier(CXCursor); |
||
3553 | |||
3554 | /** |
||
3555 | * Represents the storage classes as declared in the source. CX_SC_Invalid |
||
3556 | * was added for the case that the passed cursor in not a declaration. |
||
3557 | */ |
||
3558 | enum CX_StorageClass { |
||
3559 | CX_SC_Invalid, |
||
3560 | CX_SC_None, |
||
3561 | CX_SC_Extern, |
||
3562 | CX_SC_Static, |
||
3563 | CX_SC_PrivateExtern, |
||
3564 | CX_SC_OpenCLWorkGroupLocal, |
||
3565 | CX_SC_Auto, |
||
3566 | CX_SC_Register |
||
3567 | }; |
||
3568 | |||
3569 | /** |
||
3570 | * Returns the storage class for a function or variable declaration. |
||
3571 | * |
||
3572 | * If the passed in Cursor is not a function or variable declaration, |
||
3573 | * CX_SC_Invalid is returned else the storage class. |
||
3574 | */ |
||
3575 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_StorageClass clang_Cursor_getStorageClass(CXCursor); |
||
3576 | |||
3577 | /** |
||
3578 | * Determine the number of overloaded declarations referenced by a |
||
3579 | * \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor. |
||
3580 | * |
||
3581 | * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried. |
||
3582 | * |
||
3583 | * \returns The number of overloaded declarations referenced by \c cursor. If it |
||
3584 | * is not a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor, returns 0. |
||
3585 | */ |
||
3586 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumOverloadedDecls(CXCursor cursor); |
||
3587 | |||
3588 | /** |
||
3589 | * Retrieve a cursor for one of the overloaded declarations referenced |
||
3590 | * by a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor. |
||
3591 | * |
||
3592 | * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried. |
||
3593 | * |
||
3594 | * \param index The zero-based index into the set of overloaded declarations in |
||
3595 | * the cursor. |
||
3596 | * |
||
3597 | * \returns A cursor representing the declaration referenced by the given |
||
3598 | * \c cursor at the specified \c index. If the cursor does not have an |
||
3599 | * associated set of overloaded declarations, or if the index is out of bounds, |
||
3600 | * returns \c clang_getNullCursor(); |
||
3601 | */ |
||
3602 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getOverloadedDecl(CXCursor cursor, |
||
3603 | unsigned index); |
||
3604 | |||
3605 | /** |
||
3606 | * @} |
||
3607 | */ |
||
3608 | |||
3609 | /** |
||
3610 | * \defgroup CINDEX_ATTRIBUTES Information for attributes |
||
3611 | * |
||
3612 | * @{ |
||
3613 | */ |
||
3614 | |||
3615 | /** |
||
3616 | * For cursors representing an iboutletcollection attribute, |
||
3617 | * this function returns the collection element type. |
||
3618 | * |
||
3619 | */ |
||
3620 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getIBOutletCollectionType(CXCursor); |
||
3621 | |||
3622 | /** |
||
3623 | * @} |
||
3624 | */ |
||
3625 | |||
3626 | /** |
||
3627 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_TRAVERSAL Traversing the AST with cursors |
||
3628 | * |
||
3629 | * These routines provide the ability to traverse the abstract syntax tree |
||
3630 | * using cursors. |
||
3631 | * |
||
3632 | * @{ |
||
3633 | */ |
||
3634 | |||
3635 | /** |
||
3636 | * Describes how the traversal of the children of a particular |
||
3637 | * cursor should proceed after visiting a particular child cursor. |
||
3638 | * |
||
3639 | * A value of this enumeration type should be returned by each |
||
3640 | * \c CXCursorVisitor to indicate how clang_visitChildren() proceed. |
||
3641 | */ |
||
3642 | enum CXChildVisitResult { |
||
3643 | /** |
||
3644 | * Terminates the cursor traversal. |
||
3645 | */ |
||
3646 | CXChildVisit_Break, |
||
3647 | /** |
||
3648 | * Continues the cursor traversal with the next sibling of |
||
3649 | * the cursor just visited, without visiting its children. |
||
3650 | */ |
||
3651 | CXChildVisit_Continue, |
||
3652 | /** |
||
3653 | * Recursively traverse the children of this cursor, using |
||
3654 | * the same visitor and client data. |
||
3655 | */ |
||
3656 | CXChildVisit_Recurse |
||
3657 | }; |
||
3658 | |||
3659 | /** |
||
3660 | * Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal. |
||
3661 | * |
||
3662 | * This visitor function will be invoked for each cursor found by |
||
3663 | * clang_visitCursorChildren(). Its first argument is the cursor being |
||
3664 | * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor, |
||
3665 | * and its third argument is the client data provided to |
||
3666 | * clang_visitCursorChildren(). |
||
3667 | * |
||
3668 | * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values |
||
3669 | * to direct clang_visitCursorChildren(). |
||
3670 | */ |
||
3671 | typedef enum CXChildVisitResult (*CXCursorVisitor)(CXCursor cursor, |
||
3672 | CXCursor parent, |
||
3673 | CXClientData client_data); |
||
3674 | |||
3675 | /** |
||
3676 | * Visit the children of a particular cursor. |
||
3677 | * |
||
3678 | * This function visits all the direct children of the given cursor, |
||
3679 | * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each |
||
3680 | * visited child. The traversal may be recursive, if the visitor returns |
||
3681 | * \c CXChildVisit_Recurse. The traversal may also be ended prematurely, if |
||
3682 | * the visitor returns \c CXChildVisit_Break. |
||
3683 | * |
||
3684 | * \param parent the cursor whose child may be visited. All kinds of |
||
3685 | * cursors can be visited, including invalid cursors (which, by |
||
3686 | * definition, have no children). |
||
3687 | * |
||
3688 | * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each |
||
3689 | * child of \p parent. |
||
3690 | * |
||
3691 | * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will |
||
3692 | * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked. |
||
3693 | * |
||
3694 | * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated |
||
3695 | * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXChildVisit_Break. |
||
3696 | */ |
||
3697 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitChildren(CXCursor parent, |
||
3698 | CXCursorVisitor visitor, |
||
3699 | CXClientData client_data); |
||
3700 | #ifdef __has_feature |
||
3701 | #if __has_feature(blocks) |
||
3702 | /** |
||
3703 | * Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal. |
||
3704 | * |
||
3705 | * This visitor block will be invoked for each cursor found by |
||
3706 | * clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(). Its first argument is the cursor being |
||
3707 | * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor. |
||
3708 | * |
||
3709 | * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values |
||
3710 | * to direct clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(). |
||
3711 | */ |
||
3712 | typedef enum CXChildVisitResult (^CXCursorVisitorBlock)(CXCursor cursor, |
||
3713 | CXCursor parent); |
||
3714 | |||
3715 | /** |
||
3716 | * Visits the children of a cursor using the specified block. Behaves |
||
3717 | * identically to clang_visitChildren() in all other respects. |
||
3718 | */ |
||
3719 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
||
3720 | clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(CXCursor parent, CXCursorVisitorBlock block); |
||
3721 | #endif |
||
3722 | #endif |
||
3723 | |||
3724 | /** |
||
3725 | * @} |
||
3726 | */ |
||
3727 | |||
3728 | /** |
||
3729 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_XREF Cross-referencing in the AST |
||
3730 | * |
||
3731 | * These routines provide the ability to determine references within and |
||
3732 | * across translation units, by providing the names of the entities referenced |
||
3733 | * by cursors, follow reference cursors to the declarations they reference, |
||
3734 | * and associate declarations with their definitions. |
||
3735 | * |
||
3736 | * @{ |
||
3737 | */ |
||
3738 | |||
3739 | /** |
||
3740 | * Retrieve a Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) for the entity referenced |
||
3741 | * by the given cursor. |
||
3742 | * |
||
3743 | * A Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) is a string that identifies a particular |
||
3744 | * entity (function, class, variable, etc.) within a program. USRs can be |
||
3745 | * compared across translation units to determine, e.g., when references in |
||
3746 | * one translation refer to an entity defined in another translation unit. |
||
3747 | */ |
||
3748 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorUSR(CXCursor); |
||
3749 | |||
3750 | /** |
||
3751 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C class. |
||
3752 | */ |
||
3753 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCClass(const char *class_name); |
||
3754 | |||
3755 | /** |
||
3756 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C category. |
||
3757 | */ |
||
3758 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCCategory( |
||
3759 | const char *class_name, const char *category_name); |
||
3760 | |||
3761 | /** |
||
3762 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C protocol. |
||
3763 | */ |
||
3764 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString |
||
3765 | clang_constructUSR_ObjCProtocol(const char *protocol_name); |
||
3766 | |||
3767 | /** |
||
3768 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C instance variable and |
||
3769 | * the USR for its containing class. |
||
3770 | */ |
||
3771 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCIvar(const char *name, |
||
3772 | CXString classUSR); |
||
3773 | |||
3774 | /** |
||
3775 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C method and |
||
3776 | * the USR for its containing class. |
||
3777 | */ |
||
3778 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCMethod(const char *name, |
||
3779 | unsigned isInstanceMethod, |
||
3780 | CXString classUSR); |
||
3781 | |||
3782 | /** |
||
3783 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C property and the USR |
||
3784 | * for its containing class. |
||
3785 | */ |
||
3786 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCProperty(const char *property, |
||
3787 | CXString classUSR); |
||
3788 | |||
3789 | /** |
||
3790 | * Retrieve a name for the entity referenced by this cursor. |
||
3791 | */ |
||
3792 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorSpelling(CXCursor); |
||
3793 | |||
3794 | /** |
||
3795 | * Retrieve a range for a piece that forms the cursors spelling name. |
||
3796 | * Most of the times there is only one range for the complete spelling but for |
||
3797 | * Objective-C methods and Objective-C message expressions, there are multiple |
||
3798 | * pieces for each selector identifier. |
||
3799 | * |
||
3800 | * \param pieceIndex the index of the spelling name piece. If this is greater |
||
3801 | * than the actual number of pieces, it will return a NULL (invalid) range. |
||
3802 | * |
||
3803 | * \param options Reserved. |
||
3804 | */ |
||
3805 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getSpellingNameRange( |
||
3806 | CXCursor, unsigned pieceIndex, unsigned options); |
||
3807 | |||
3808 | /** |
||
3809 | * Opaque pointer representing a policy that controls pretty printing |
||
3810 | * for \c clang_getCursorPrettyPrinted. |
||
3811 | */ |
||
3812 | typedef void *CXPrintingPolicy; |
||
3813 | |||
3814 | /** |
||
3815 | * Properties for the printing policy. |
||
3816 | * |
||
3817 | * See \c clang::PrintingPolicy for more information. |
||
3818 | */ |
||
3819 | enum CXPrintingPolicyProperty { |
||
3820 | CXPrintingPolicy_Indentation, |
||
3821 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressSpecifiers, |
||
3822 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressTagKeyword, |
||
3823 | CXPrintingPolicy_IncludeTagDefinition, |
||
3824 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressScope, |
||
3825 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressUnwrittenScope, |
||
3826 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressInitializers, |
||
3827 | CXPrintingPolicy_ConstantArraySizeAsWritten, |
||
3828 | CXPrintingPolicy_AnonymousTagLocations, |
||
3829 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressStrongLifetime, |
||
3830 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressLifetimeQualifiers, |
||
3831 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressTemplateArgsInCXXConstructors, |
||
3832 | CXPrintingPolicy_Bool, |
||
3833 | CXPrintingPolicy_Restrict, |
||
3834 | CXPrintingPolicy_Alignof, |
||
3835 | CXPrintingPolicy_UnderscoreAlignof, |
||
3836 | CXPrintingPolicy_UseVoidForZeroParams, |
||
3837 | CXPrintingPolicy_TerseOutput, |
||
3838 | CXPrintingPolicy_PolishForDeclaration, |
||
3839 | CXPrintingPolicy_Half, |
||
3840 | CXPrintingPolicy_MSWChar, |
||
3841 | CXPrintingPolicy_IncludeNewlines, |
||
3842 | CXPrintingPolicy_MSVCFormatting, |
||
3843 | CXPrintingPolicy_ConstantsAsWritten, |
||
3844 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressImplicitBase, |
||
3845 | CXPrintingPolicy_FullyQualifiedName, |
||
3846 | |||
3847 | CXPrintingPolicy_LastProperty = CXPrintingPolicy_FullyQualifiedName |
||
3848 | }; |
||
3849 | |||
3850 | /** |
||
3851 | * Get a property value for the given printing policy. |
||
3852 | */ |
||
3853 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
||
3854 | clang_PrintingPolicy_getProperty(CXPrintingPolicy Policy, |
||
3855 | enum CXPrintingPolicyProperty Property); |
||
3856 | |||
3857 | /** |
||
3858 | * Set a property value for the given printing policy. |
||
3859 | */ |
||
3860 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void |
||
3861 | clang_PrintingPolicy_setProperty(CXPrintingPolicy Policy, |
||
3862 | enum CXPrintingPolicyProperty Property, |
||
3863 | unsigned Value); |
||
3864 | |||
3865 | /** |
||
3866 | * Retrieve the default policy for the cursor. |
||
3867 | * |
||
3868 | * The policy should be released after use with \c |
||
3869 | * clang_PrintingPolicy_dispose. |
||
3870 | */ |
||
3871 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXPrintingPolicy clang_getCursorPrintingPolicy(CXCursor); |
||
3872 | |||
3873 | /** |
||
3874 | * Release a printing policy. |
||
3875 | */ |
||
3876 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_PrintingPolicy_dispose(CXPrintingPolicy Policy); |
||
3877 | |||
3878 | /** |
||
3879 | * Pretty print declarations. |
||
3880 | * |
||
3881 | * \param Cursor The cursor representing a declaration. |
||
3882 | * |
||
3883 | * \param Policy The policy to control the entities being printed. If |
||
3884 | * NULL, a default policy is used. |
||
3885 | * |
||
3886 | * \returns The pretty printed declaration or the empty string for |
||
3887 | * other cursors. |
||
3888 | */ |
||
3889 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorPrettyPrinted(CXCursor Cursor, |
||
3890 | CXPrintingPolicy Policy); |
||
3891 | |||
3892 | /** |
||
3893 | * Retrieve the display name for the entity referenced by this cursor. |
||
3894 | * |
||
3895 | * The display name contains extra information that helps identify the cursor, |
||
3896 | * such as the parameters of a function or template or the arguments of a |
||
3897 | * class template specialization. |
||
3898 | */ |
||
3899 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorDisplayName(CXCursor); |
||
3900 | |||
3901 | /** For a cursor that is a reference, retrieve a cursor representing the |
||
3902 | * entity that it references. |
||
3903 | * |
||
3904 | * Reference cursors refer to other entities in the AST. For example, an |
||
3905 | * Objective-C superclass reference cursor refers to an Objective-C class. |
||
3906 | * This function produces the cursor for the Objective-C class from the |
||
3907 | * cursor for the superclass reference. If the input cursor is a declaration or |
||
3908 | * definition, it returns that declaration or definition unchanged. |
||
3909 | * Otherwise, returns the NULL cursor. |
||
3910 | */ |
||
3911 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorReferenced(CXCursor); |
||
3912 | |||
3913 | /** |
||
3914 | * For a cursor that is either a reference to or a declaration |
||
3915 | * of some entity, retrieve a cursor that describes the definition of |
||
3916 | * that entity. |
||
3917 | * |
||
3918 | * Some entities can be declared multiple times within a translation |
||
3919 | * unit, but only one of those declarations can also be a |
||
3920 | * definition. For example, given: |
||
3921 | * |
||
3922 | * \code |
||
3923 | * int f(int, int); |
||
3924 | * int g(int x, int y) { return f(x, y); } |
||
3925 | * int f(int a, int b) { return a + b; } |
||
3926 | * int f(int, int); |
||
3927 | * \endcode |
||
3928 | * |
||
3929 | * there are three declarations of the function "f", but only the |
||
3930 | * second one is a definition. The clang_getCursorDefinition() |
||
3931 | * function will take any cursor pointing to a declaration of "f" |
||
3932 | * (the first or fourth lines of the example) or a cursor referenced |
||
3933 | * that uses "f" (the call to "f' inside "g") and will return a |
||
3934 | * declaration cursor pointing to the definition (the second "f" |
||
3935 | * declaration). |
||
3936 | * |
||
3937 | * If given a cursor for which there is no corresponding definition, |
||
3938 | * e.g., because there is no definition of that entity within this |
||
3939 | * translation unit, returns a NULL cursor. |
||
3940 | */ |
||
3941 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorDefinition(CXCursor); |
||
3942 | |||
3943 | /** |
||
3944 | * Determine whether the declaration pointed to by this cursor |
||
3945 | * is also a definition of that entity. |
||
3946 | */ |
||
3947 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isCursorDefinition(CXCursor); |
||
3948 | |||
3949 | /** |
||
3950 | * Retrieve the canonical cursor corresponding to the given cursor. |
||
3951 | * |
||
3952 | * In the C family of languages, many kinds of entities can be declared several |
||
3953 | * times within a single translation unit. For example, a structure type can |
||
3954 | * be forward-declared (possibly multiple times) and later defined: |
||
3955 | * |
||
3956 | * \code |
||
3957 | * struct X; |
||
3958 | * struct X; |
||
3959 | * struct X { |
||
3960 | * int member; |
||
3961 | * }; |
||
3962 | * \endcode |
||
3963 | * |
||
3964 | * The declarations and the definition of \c X are represented by three |
||
3965 | * different cursors, all of which are declarations of the same underlying |
||
3966 | * entity. One of these cursor is considered the "canonical" cursor, which |
||
3967 | * is effectively the representative for the underlying entity. One can |
||
3968 | * determine if two cursors are declarations of the same underlying entity by |
||
3969 | * comparing their canonical cursors. |
||
3970 | * |
||
3971 | * \returns The canonical cursor for the entity referred to by the given cursor. |
||
3972 | */ |
||
3973 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCanonicalCursor(CXCursor); |
||
3974 | |||
3975 | /** |
||
3976 | * If the cursor points to a selector identifier in an Objective-C |
||
3977 | * method or message expression, this returns the selector index. |
||
3978 | * |
||
3979 | * After getting a cursor with #clang_getCursor, this can be called to |
||
3980 | * determine if the location points to a selector identifier. |
||
3981 | * |
||
3982 | * \returns The selector index if the cursor is an Objective-C method or message |
||
3983 | * expression and the cursor is pointing to a selector identifier, or -1 |
||
3984 | * otherwise. |
||
3985 | */ |
||
3986 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getObjCSelectorIndex(CXCursor); |
||
3987 | |||
3988 | /** |
||
3989 | * Given a cursor pointing to a C++ method call or an Objective-C |
||
3990 | * message, returns non-zero if the method/message is "dynamic", meaning: |
||
3991 | * |
||
3992 | * For a C++ method: the call is virtual. |
||
3993 | * For an Objective-C message: the receiver is an object instance, not 'super' |
||
3994 | * or a specific class. |
||
3995 | * |
||
3996 | * If the method/message is "static" or the cursor does not point to a |
||
3997 | * method/message, it will return zero. |
||
3998 | */ |
||
3999 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isDynamicCall(CXCursor C); |
||
4000 | |||
4001 | /** |
||
4002 | * Given a cursor pointing to an Objective-C message or property |
||
4003 | * reference, or C++ method call, returns the CXType of the receiver. |
||
4004 | */ |
||
4005 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getReceiverType(CXCursor C); |
||
4006 | |||
4007 | /** |
||
4008 | * Property attributes for a \c CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl. |
||
4009 | */ |
||
4010 | typedef enum { |
||
4011 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_noattr = 0x00, |
||
4012 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_readonly = 0x01, |
||
4013 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_getter = 0x02, |
||
4014 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_assign = 0x04, |
||
4015 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_readwrite = 0x08, |
||
4016 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_retain = 0x10, |
||
4017 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_copy = 0x20, |
||
4018 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_nonatomic = 0x40, |
||
4019 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_setter = 0x80, |
||
4020 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_atomic = 0x100, |
||
4021 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_weak = 0x200, |
||
4022 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_strong = 0x400, |
||
4023 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_unsafe_unretained = 0x800, |
||
4024 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_class = 0x1000 |
||
4025 | } CXObjCPropertyAttrKind; |
||
4026 | |||
4027 | /** |
||
4028 | * Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the |
||
4029 | * associated property attributes. The bits are formed from |
||
4030 | * \c CXObjCPropertyAttrKind. |
||
4031 | * |
||
4032 | * \param reserved Reserved for future use, pass 0. |
||
4033 | */ |
||
4034 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
||
4035 | clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertyAttributes(CXCursor C, unsigned reserved); |
||
4036 | |||
4037 | /** |
||
4038 | * Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the |
||
4039 | * name of the method that implements the getter. |
||
4040 | */ |
||
4041 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertyGetterName(CXCursor C); |
||
4042 | |||
4043 | /** |
||
4044 | * Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the |
||
4045 | * name of the method that implements the setter, if any. |
||
4046 | */ |
||
4047 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertySetterName(CXCursor C); |
||
4048 | |||
4049 | /** |
||
4050 | * 'Qualifiers' written next to the return and parameter types in |
||
4051 | * Objective-C method declarations. |
||
4052 | */ |
||
4053 | typedef enum { |
||
4054 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_None = 0x0, |
||
4055 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_In = 0x1, |
||
4056 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_Inout = 0x2, |
||
4057 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_Out = 0x4, |
||
4058 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_Bycopy = 0x8, |
||
4059 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_Byref = 0x10, |
||
4060 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_Oneway = 0x20 |
||
4061 | } CXObjCDeclQualifierKind; |
||
4062 | |||
4063 | /** |
||
4064 | * Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or parameter |
||
4065 | * declaration, return the associated Objective-C qualifiers for the return |
||
4066 | * type or the parameter respectively. The bits are formed from |
||
4067 | * CXObjCDeclQualifierKind. |
||
4068 | */ |
||
4069 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCDeclQualifiers(CXCursor C); |
||
4070 | |||
4071 | /** |
||
4072 | * Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or property |
||
4073 | * declaration, return non-zero if the declaration was affected by "\@optional". |
||
4074 | * Returns zero if the cursor is not such a declaration or it is "\@required". |
||
4075 | */ |
||
4076 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isObjCOptional(CXCursor C); |
||
4077 | |||
4078 | /** |
||
4079 | * Returns non-zero if the given cursor is a variadic function or method. |
||
4080 | */ |
||
4081 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isVariadic(CXCursor C); |
||
4082 | |||
4083 | /** |
||
4084 | * Returns non-zero if the given cursor points to a symbol marked with |
||
4085 | * external_source_symbol attribute. |
||
4086 | * |
||
4087 | * \param language If non-NULL, and the attribute is present, will be set to |
||
4088 | * the 'language' string from the attribute. |
||
4089 | * |
||
4090 | * \param definedIn If non-NULL, and the attribute is present, will be set to |
||
4091 | * the 'definedIn' string from the attribute. |
||
4092 | * |
||
4093 | * \param isGenerated If non-NULL, and the attribute is present, will be set to |
||
4094 | * non-zero if the 'generated_declaration' is set in the attribute. |
||
4095 | */ |
||
4096 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isExternalSymbol(CXCursor C, |
||
4097 | CXString *language, |
||
4098 | CXString *definedIn, |
||
4099 | unsigned *isGenerated); |
||
4100 | |||
4101 | /** |
||
4102 | * Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated |
||
4103 | * comment's source range. The range may include multiple consecutive comments |
||
4104 | * with whitespace in between. |
||
4105 | */ |
||
4106 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getCommentRange(CXCursor C); |
||
4107 | |||
4108 | /** |
||
4109 | * Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated |
||
4110 | * comment text, including comment markers. |
||
4111 | */ |
||
4112 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getRawCommentText(CXCursor C); |
||
4113 | |||
4114 | /** |
||
4115 | * Given a cursor that represents a documentable entity (e.g., |
||
4116 | * declaration), return the associated \paragraph; otherwise return the |
||
4117 | * first paragraph. |
||
4118 | */ |
||
4119 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getBriefCommentText(CXCursor C); |
||
4120 | |||
4121 | /** |
||
4122 | * @} |
||
4123 | */ |
||
4124 | |||
4125 | /** \defgroup CINDEX_MANGLE Name Mangling API Functions |
||
4126 | * |
||
4127 | * @{ |
||
4128 | */ |
||
4129 | |||
4130 | /** |
||
4131 | * Retrieve the CXString representing the mangled name of the cursor. |
||
4132 | */ |
||
4133 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getMangling(CXCursor); |
||
4134 | |||
4135 | /** |
||
4136 | * Retrieve the CXStrings representing the mangled symbols of the C++ |
||
4137 | * constructor or destructor at the cursor. |
||
4138 | */ |
||
4139 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXStringSet *clang_Cursor_getCXXManglings(CXCursor); |
||
4140 | |||
4141 | /** |
||
4142 | * Retrieve the CXStrings representing the mangled symbols of the ObjC |
||
4143 | * class interface or implementation at the cursor. |
||
4144 | */ |
||
4145 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXStringSet *clang_Cursor_getObjCManglings(CXCursor); |
||
4146 | |||
4147 | /** |
||
4148 | * @} |
||
4149 | */ |
||
4150 | |||
4151 | /** |
||
4152 | * \defgroup CINDEX_MODULE Module introspection |
||
4153 | * |
||
4154 | * The functions in this group provide access to information about modules. |
||
4155 | * |
||
4156 | * @{ |
||
4157 | */ |
||
4158 | |||
4159 | typedef void *CXModule; |
||
4160 | |||
4161 | /** |
||
4162 | * Given a CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl cursor, return the associated module. |
||
4163 | */ |
||
4164 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Cursor_getModule(CXCursor C); |
||
4165 | |||
4166 | /** |
||
4167 | * Given a CXFile header file, return the module that contains it, if one |
||
4168 | * exists. |
||
4169 | */ |
||
4170 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_getModuleForFile(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile); |
||
4171 | |||
4172 | /** |
||
4173 | * \param Module a module object. |
||
4174 | * |
||
4175 | * \returns the module file where the provided module object came from. |
||
4176 | */ |
||
4177 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_Module_getASTFile(CXModule Module); |
||
4178 | |||
4179 | /** |
||
4180 | * \param Module a module object. |
||
4181 | * |
||
4182 | * \returns the parent of a sub-module or NULL if the given module is top-level, |
||
4183 | * e.g. for 'std.vector' it will return the 'std' module. |
||
4184 | */ |
||
4185 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Module_getParent(CXModule Module); |
||
4186 | |||
4187 | /** |
||
4188 | * \param Module a module object. |
||
4189 | * |
||
4190 | * \returns the name of the module, e.g. for the 'std.vector' sub-module it |
||
4191 | * will return "vector". |
||
4192 | */ |
||
4193 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getName(CXModule Module); |
||
4194 | |||
4195 | /** |
||
4196 | * \param Module a module object. |
||
4197 | * |
||
4198 | * \returns the full name of the module, e.g. "std.vector". |
||
4199 | */ |
||
4200 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getFullName(CXModule Module); |
||
4201 | |||
4202 | /** |
||
4203 | * \param Module a module object. |
||
4204 | * |
||
4205 | * \returns non-zero if the module is a system one. |
||
4206 | */ |
||
4207 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Module_isSystem(CXModule Module); |
||
4208 | |||
4209 | /** |
||
4210 | * \param Module a module object. |
||
4211 | * |
||
4212 | * \returns the number of top level headers associated with this module. |
||
4213 | */ |
||
4214 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Module_getNumTopLevelHeaders(CXTranslationUnit, |
||
4215 | CXModule Module); |
||
4216 | |||
4217 | /** |
||
4218 | * \param Module a module object. |
||
4219 | * |
||
4220 | * \param Index top level header index (zero-based). |
||
4221 | * |
||
4222 | * \returns the specified top level header associated with the module. |
||
4223 | */ |
||
4224 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
4225 | CXFile clang_Module_getTopLevelHeader(CXTranslationUnit, CXModule Module, |
||
4226 | unsigned Index); |
||
4227 | |||
4228 | /** |
||
4229 | * @} |
||
4230 | */ |
||
4231 | |||
4232 | /** |
||
4233 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CPP C++ AST introspection |
||
4234 | * |
||
4235 | * The routines in this group provide access information in the ASTs specific |
||
4236 | * to C++ language features. |
||
4237 | * |
||
4238 | * @{ |
||
4239 | */ |
||
4240 | |||
4241 | /** |
||
4242 | * Determine if a C++ constructor is a converting constructor. |
||
4243 | */ |
||
4244 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
||
4245 | clang_CXXConstructor_isConvertingConstructor(CXCursor C); |
||
4246 | |||
4247 | /** |
||
4248 | * Determine if a C++ constructor is a copy constructor. |
||
4249 | */ |
||
4250 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isCopyConstructor(CXCursor C); |
||
4251 | |||
4252 | /** |
||
4253 | * Determine if a C++ constructor is the default constructor. |
||
4254 | */ |
||
4255 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isDefaultConstructor(CXCursor C); |
||
4256 | |||
4257 | /** |
||
4258 | * Determine if a C++ constructor is a move constructor. |
||
4259 | */ |
||
4260 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isMoveConstructor(CXCursor C); |
||
4261 | |||
4262 | /** |
||
4263 | * Determine if a C++ field is declared 'mutable'. |
||
4264 | */ |
||
4265 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXField_isMutable(CXCursor C); |
||
4266 | |||
4267 | /** |
||
4268 | * Determine if a C++ method is declared '= default'. |
||
4269 | */ |
||
4270 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isDefaulted(CXCursor C); |
||
4271 | |||
4272 | /** |
||
4273 | * Determine if a C++ method is declared '= delete'. |
||
4274 | */ |
||
4275 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isDeleted(CXCursor C); |
||
4276 | |||
4277 | /** |
||
4278 | * Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is |
||
4279 | * pure virtual. |
||
4280 | */ |
||
4281 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isPureVirtual(CXCursor C); |
||
4282 | |||
4283 | /** |
||
4284 | * Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is |
||
4285 | * declared 'static'. |
||
4286 | */ |
||
4287 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isStatic(CXCursor C); |
||
4288 | |||
4289 | /** |
||
4290 | * Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is |
||
4291 | * explicitly declared 'virtual' or if it overrides a virtual method from |
||
4292 | * one of the base classes. |
||
4293 | */ |
||
4294 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isVirtual(CXCursor C); |
||
4295 | |||
4296 | /** |
||
4297 | * Determine if a C++ member function is a copy-assignment operator, |
||
4298 | * returning 1 if such is the case and 0 otherwise. |
||
4299 | * |
||
4300 | * > A copy-assignment operator `X::operator=` is a non-static, |
||
4301 | * > non-template member function of _class_ `X` with exactly one |
||
4302 | * > parameter of type `X`, `X&`, `const X&`, `volatile X&` or `const |
||
4303 | * > volatile X&`. |
||
4304 | * |
||
4305 | * That is, for example, the `operator=` in: |
||
4306 | * |
||
4307 | * class Foo { |
||
4308 | * bool operator=(const volatile Foo&); |
||
4309 | * }; |
||
4310 | * |
||
4311 | * Is a copy-assignment operator, while the `operator=` in: |
||
4312 | * |
||
4313 | * class Bar { |
||
4314 | * bool operator=(const int&); |
||
4315 | * }; |
||
4316 | * |
||
4317 | * Is not. |
||
4318 | */ |
||
4319 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isCopyAssignmentOperator(CXCursor C); |
||
4320 | |||
4321 | /** |
||
4322 | * Determine if a C++ member function is a move-assignment operator, |
||
4323 | * returning 1 if such is the case and 0 otherwise. |
||
4324 | * |
||
4325 | * > A move-assignment operator `X::operator=` is a non-static, |
||
4326 | * > non-template member function of _class_ `X` with exactly one |
||
4327 | * > parameter of type `X&&`, `const X&&`, `volatile X&&` or `const |
||
4328 | * > volatile X&&`. |
||
4329 | * |
||
4330 | * That is, for example, the `operator=` in: |
||
4331 | * |
||
4332 | * class Foo { |
||
4333 | * bool operator=(const volatile Foo&&); |
||
4334 | * }; |
||
4335 | * |
||
4336 | * Is a move-assignment operator, while the `operator=` in: |
||
4337 | * |
||
4338 | * class Bar { |
||
4339 | * bool operator=(const int&&); |
||
4340 | * }; |
||
4341 | * |
||
4342 | * Is not. |
||
4343 | */ |
||
4344 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isMoveAssignmentOperator(CXCursor C); |
||
4345 | |||
4346 | /** |
||
4347 | * Determine if a C++ record is abstract, i.e. whether a class or struct |
||
4348 | * has a pure virtual member function. |
||
4349 | */ |
||
4350 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXRecord_isAbstract(CXCursor C); |
||
4351 | |||
4352 | /** |
||
4353 | * Determine if an enum declaration refers to a scoped enum. |
||
4354 | */ |
||
4355 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_EnumDecl_isScoped(CXCursor C); |
||
4356 | |||
4357 | /** |
||
4358 | * Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is |
||
4359 | * declared 'const'. |
||
4360 | */ |
||
4361 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isConst(CXCursor C); |
||
4362 | |||
4363 | /** |
||
4364 | * Given a cursor that represents a template, determine |
||
4365 | * the cursor kind of the specializations would be generated by instantiating |
||
4366 | * the template. |
||
4367 | * |
||
4368 | * This routine can be used to determine what flavor of function template, |
||
4369 | * class template, or class template partial specialization is stored in the |
||
4370 | * cursor. For example, it can describe whether a class template cursor is |
||
4371 | * declared with "struct", "class" or "union". |
||
4372 | * |
||
4373 | * \param C The cursor to query. This cursor should represent a template |
||
4374 | * declaration. |
||
4375 | * |
||
4376 | * \returns The cursor kind of the specializations that would be generated |
||
4377 | * by instantiating the template \p C. If \p C is not a template, returns |
||
4378 | * \c CXCursor_NoDeclFound. |
||
4379 | */ |
||
4380 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getTemplateCursorKind(CXCursor C); |
||
4381 | |||
4382 | /** |
||
4383 | * Given a cursor that may represent a specialization or instantiation |
||
4384 | * of a template, retrieve the cursor that represents the template that it |
||
4385 | * specializes or from which it was instantiated. |
||
4386 | * |
||
4387 | * This routine determines the template involved both for explicit |
||
4388 | * specializations of templates and for implicit instantiations of the template, |
||
4389 | * both of which are referred to as "specializations". For a class template |
||
4390 | * specialization (e.g., \c std::vector<bool>), this routine will return |
||
4391 | * either the primary template (\c std::vector) or, if the specialization was |
||
4392 | * instantiated from a class template partial specialization, the class template |
||
4393 | * partial specialization. For a class template partial specialization and a |
||
4394 | * function template specialization (including instantiations), this |
||
4395 | * this routine will return the specialized template. |
||
4396 | * |
||
4397 | * For members of a class template (e.g., member functions, member classes, or |
||
4398 | * static data members), returns the specialized or instantiated member. |
||
4399 | * Although not strictly "templates" in the C++ language, members of class |
||
4400 | * templates have the same notions of specializations and instantiations that |
||
4401 | * templates do, so this routine treats them similarly. |
||
4402 | * |
||
4403 | * \param C A cursor that may be a specialization of a template or a member |
||
4404 | * of a template. |
||
4405 | * |
||
4406 | * \returns If the given cursor is a specialization or instantiation of a |
||
4407 | * template or a member thereof, the template or member that it specializes or |
||
4408 | * from which it was instantiated. Otherwise, returns a NULL cursor. |
||
4409 | */ |
||
4410 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getSpecializedCursorTemplate(CXCursor C); |
||
4411 | |||
4412 | /** |
||
4413 | * Given a cursor that references something else, return the source range |
||
4414 | * covering that reference. |
||
4415 | * |
||
4416 | * \param C A cursor pointing to a member reference, a declaration reference, or |
||
4417 | * an operator call. |
||
4418 | * \param NameFlags A bitset with three independent flags: |
||
4419 | * CXNameRange_WantQualifier, CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs, and |
||
4420 | * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece. |
||
4421 | * \param PieceIndex For contiguous names or when passing the flag |
||
4422 | * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece, only one piece with index 0 is |
||
4423 | * available. When the CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece flag is not passed for a |
||
4424 | * non-contiguous names, this index can be used to retrieve the individual |
||
4425 | * pieces of the name. See also CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece. |
||
4426 | * |
||
4427 | * \returns The piece of the name pointed to by the given cursor. If there is no |
||
4428 | * name, or if the PieceIndex is out-of-range, a null-cursor will be returned. |
||
4429 | */ |
||
4430 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorReferenceNameRange( |
||
4431 | CXCursor C, unsigned NameFlags, unsigned PieceIndex); |
||
4432 | |||
4433 | enum CXNameRefFlags { |
||
4434 | /** |
||
4435 | * Include the nested-name-specifier, e.g. Foo:: in x.Foo::y, in the |
||
4436 | * range. |
||
4437 | */ |
||
4438 | CXNameRange_WantQualifier = 0x1, |
||
4439 | |||
4440 | /** |
||
4441 | * Include the explicit template arguments, e.g. \<int> in x.f<int>, |
||
4442 | * in the range. |
||
4443 | */ |
||
4444 | CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs = 0x2, |
||
4445 | |||
4446 | /** |
||
4447 | * If the name is non-contiguous, return the full spanning range. |
||
4448 | * |
||
4449 | * Non-contiguous names occur in Objective-C when a selector with two or more |
||
4450 | * parameters is used, or in C++ when using an operator: |
||
4451 | * \code |
||
4452 | * [object doSomething:here withValue:there]; // Objective-C |
||
4453 | * return some_vector[1]; // C++ |
||
4454 | * \endcode |
||
4455 | */ |
||
4456 | CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece = 0x4 |
||
4457 | }; |
||
4458 | |||
4459 | /** |
||
4460 | * @} |
||
4461 | */ |
||
4462 | |||
4463 | /** |
||
4464 | * \defgroup CINDEX_LEX Token extraction and manipulation |
||
4465 | * |
||
4466 | * The routines in this group provide access to the tokens within a |
||
4467 | * translation unit, along with a semantic mapping of those tokens to |
||
4468 | * their corresponding cursors. |
||
4469 | * |
||
4470 | * @{ |
||
4471 | */ |
||
4472 | |||
4473 | /** |
||
4474 | * Describes a kind of token. |
||
4475 | */ |
||
4476 | typedef enum CXTokenKind { |
||
4477 | /** |
||
4478 | * A token that contains some kind of punctuation. |
||
4479 | */ |
||
4480 | CXToken_Punctuation, |
||
4481 | |||
4482 | /** |
||
4483 | * A language keyword. |
||
4484 | */ |
||
4485 | CXToken_Keyword, |
||
4486 | |||
4487 | /** |
||
4488 | * An identifier (that is not a keyword). |
||
4489 | */ |
||
4490 | CXToken_Identifier, |
||
4491 | |||
4492 | /** |
||
4493 | * A numeric, string, or character literal. |
||
4494 | */ |
||
4495 | CXToken_Literal, |
||
4496 | |||
4497 | /** |
||
4498 | * A comment. |
||
4499 | */ |
||
4500 | CXToken_Comment |
||
4501 | } CXTokenKind; |
||
4502 | |||
4503 | /** |
||
4504 | * Describes a single preprocessing token. |
||
4505 | */ |
||
4506 | typedef struct { |
||
4507 | unsigned int_data[4]; |
||
4508 | void *ptr_data; |
||
4509 | } CXToken; |
||
4510 | |||
4511 | /** |
||
4512 | * Get the raw lexical token starting with the given location. |
||
4513 | * |
||
4514 | * \param TU the translation unit whose text is being tokenized. |
||
4515 | * |
||
4516 | * \param Location the source location with which the token starts. |
||
4517 | * |
||
4518 | * \returns The token starting with the given location or NULL if no such token |
||
4519 | * exist. The returned pointer must be freed with clang_disposeTokens before the |
||
4520 | * translation unit is destroyed. |
||
4521 | */ |
||
4522 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXToken *clang_getToken(CXTranslationUnit TU, |
||
4523 | CXSourceLocation Location); |
||
4524 | |||
4525 | /** |
||
4526 | * Determine the kind of the given token. |
||
4527 | */ |
||
4528 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTokenKind clang_getTokenKind(CXToken); |
||
4529 | |||
4530 | /** |
||
4531 | * Determine the spelling of the given token. |
||
4532 | * |
||
4533 | * The spelling of a token is the textual representation of that token, e.g., |
||
4534 | * the text of an identifier or keyword. |
||
4535 | */ |
||
4536 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTokenSpelling(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken); |
||
4537 | |||
4538 | /** |
||
4539 | * Retrieve the source location of the given token. |
||
4540 | */ |
||
4541 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getTokenLocation(CXTranslationUnit, |
||
4542 | CXToken); |
||
4543 | |||
4544 | /** |
||
4545 | * Retrieve a source range that covers the given token. |
||
4546 | */ |
||
4547 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getTokenExtent(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken); |
||
4548 | |||
4549 | /** |
||
4550 | * Tokenize the source code described by the given range into raw |
||
4551 | * lexical tokens. |
||
4552 | * |
||
4553 | * \param TU the translation unit whose text is being tokenized. |
||
4554 | * |
||
4555 | * \param Range the source range in which text should be tokenized. All of the |
||
4556 | * tokens produced by tokenization will fall within this source range, |
||
4557 | * |
||
4558 | * \param Tokens this pointer will be set to point to the array of tokens |
||
4559 | * that occur within the given source range. The returned pointer must be |
||
4560 | * freed with clang_disposeTokens() before the translation unit is destroyed. |
||
4561 | * |
||
4562 | * \param NumTokens will be set to the number of tokens in the \c *Tokens |
||
4563 | * array. |
||
4564 | * |
||
4565 | */ |
||
4566 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_tokenize(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXSourceRange Range, |
||
4567 | CXToken **Tokens, unsigned *NumTokens); |
||
4568 | |||
4569 | /** |
||
4570 | * Annotate the given set of tokens by providing cursors for each token |
||
4571 | * that can be mapped to a specific entity within the abstract syntax tree. |
||
4572 | * |
||
4573 | * This token-annotation routine is equivalent to invoking |
||
4574 | * clang_getCursor() for the source locations of each of the |
||
4575 | * tokens. The cursors provided are filtered, so that only those |
||
4576 | * cursors that have a direct correspondence to the token are |
||
4577 | * accepted. For example, given a function call \c f(x), |
||
4578 | * clang_getCursor() would provide the following cursors: |
||
4579 | * |
||
4580 | * * when the cursor is over the 'f', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'f'. |
||
4581 | * * when the cursor is over the '(' or the ')', a CallExpr referring to 'f'. |
||
4582 | * * when the cursor is over the 'x', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'x'. |
||
4583 | * |
||
4584 | * Only the first and last of these cursors will occur within the |
||
4585 | * annotate, since the tokens "f" and "x' directly refer to a function |
||
4586 | * and a variable, respectively, but the parentheses are just a small |
||
4587 | * part of the full syntax of the function call expression, which is |
||
4588 | * not provided as an annotation. |
||
4589 | * |
||
4590 | * \param TU the translation unit that owns the given tokens. |
||
4591 | * |
||
4592 | * \param Tokens the set of tokens to annotate. |
||
4593 | * |
||
4594 | * \param NumTokens the number of tokens in \p Tokens. |
||
4595 | * |
||
4596 | * \param Cursors an array of \p NumTokens cursors, whose contents will be |
||
4597 | * replaced with the cursors corresponding to each token. |
||
4598 | */ |
||
4599 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_annotateTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXToken *Tokens, |
||
4600 | unsigned NumTokens, CXCursor *Cursors); |
||
4601 | |||
4602 | /** |
||
4603 | * Free the given set of tokens. |
||
4604 | */ |
||
4605 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXToken *Tokens, |
||
4606 | unsigned NumTokens); |
||
4607 | |||
4608 | /** |
||
4609 | * @} |
||
4610 | */ |
||
4611 | |||
4612 | /** |
||
4613 | * \defgroup CINDEX_DEBUG Debugging facilities |
||
4614 | * |
||
4615 | * These routines are used for testing and debugging, only, and should not |
||
4616 | * be relied upon. |
||
4617 | * |
||
4618 | * @{ |
||
4619 | */ |
||
4620 | |||
4621 | /* for debug/testing */ |
||
4622 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorKindSpelling(enum CXCursorKind Kind); |
||
4623 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getDefinitionSpellingAndExtent( |
||
4624 | CXCursor, const char **startBuf, const char **endBuf, unsigned *startLine, |
||
4625 | unsigned *startColumn, unsigned *endLine, unsigned *endColumn); |
||
4626 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_enableStackTraces(void); |
||
4627 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_executeOnThread(void (*fn)(void *), void *user_data, |
||
4628 | unsigned stack_size); |
||
4629 | |||
4630 | /** |
||
4631 | * @} |
||
4632 | */ |
||
4633 | |||
4634 | /** |
||
4635 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CODE_COMPLET Code completion |
||
4636 | * |
||
4637 | * Code completion involves taking an (incomplete) source file, along with |
||
4638 | * knowledge of where the user is actively editing that file, and suggesting |
||
4639 | * syntactically- and semantically-valid constructs that the user might want to |
||
4640 | * use at that particular point in the source code. These data structures and |
||
4641 | * routines provide support for code completion. |
||
4642 | * |
||
4643 | * @{ |
||
4644 | */ |
||
4645 | |||
4646 | /** |
||
4647 | * A semantic string that describes a code-completion result. |
||
4648 | * |
||
4649 | * A semantic string that describes the formatting of a code-completion |
||
4650 | * result as a single "template" of text that should be inserted into the |
||
4651 | * source buffer when a particular code-completion result is selected. |
||
4652 | * Each semantic string is made up of some number of "chunks", each of which |
||
4653 | * contains some text along with a description of what that text means, e.g., |
||
4654 | * the name of the entity being referenced, whether the text chunk is part of |
||
4655 | * the template, or whether it is a "placeholder" that the user should replace |
||
4656 | * with actual code,of a specific kind. See \c CXCompletionChunkKind for a |
||
4657 | * description of the different kinds of chunks. |
||
4658 | */ |
||
4659 | typedef void *CXCompletionString; |
||
4660 | |||
4661 | /** |
||
4662 | * A single result of code completion. |
||
4663 | */ |
||
4664 | typedef struct { |
||
4665 | /** |
||
4666 | * The kind of entity that this completion refers to. |
||
4667 | * |
||
4668 | * The cursor kind will be a macro, keyword, or a declaration (one of the |
||
4669 | * *Decl cursor kinds), describing the entity that the completion is |
||
4670 | * referring to. |
||
4671 | * |
||
4672 | * \todo In the future, we would like to provide a full cursor, to allow |
||
4673 | * the client to extract additional information from declaration. |
||
4674 | */ |
||
4675 | enum CXCursorKind CursorKind; |
||
4676 | |||
4677 | /** |
||
4678 | * The code-completion string that describes how to insert this |
||
4679 | * code-completion result into the editing buffer. |
||
4680 | */ |
||
4681 | CXCompletionString CompletionString; |
||
4682 | } CXCompletionResult; |
||
4683 | |||
4684 | /** |
||
4685 | * Describes a single piece of text within a code-completion string. |
||
4686 | * |
||
4687 | * Each "chunk" within a code-completion string (\c CXCompletionString) is |
||
4688 | * either a piece of text with a specific "kind" that describes how that text |
||
4689 | * should be interpreted by the client or is another completion string. |
||
4690 | */ |
||
4691 | enum CXCompletionChunkKind { |
||
4692 | /** |
||
4693 | * A code-completion string that describes "optional" text that |
||
4694 | * could be a part of the template (but is not required). |
||
4695 | * |
||
4696 | * The Optional chunk is the only kind of chunk that has a code-completion |
||
4697 | * string for its representation, which is accessible via |
||
4698 | * \c clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(). The code-completion string |
||
4699 | * describes an additional part of the template that is completely optional. |
||
4700 | * For example, optional chunks can be used to describe the placeholders for |
||
4701 | * arguments that match up with defaulted function parameters, e.g. given: |
||
4702 | * |
||
4703 | * \code |
||
4704 | * void f(int x, float y = 3.14, double z = 2.71828); |
||
4705 | * \endcode |
||
4706 | * |
||
4707 | * The code-completion string for this function would contain: |
||
4708 | * - a TypedText chunk for "f". |
||
4709 | * - a LeftParen chunk for "(". |
||
4710 | * - a Placeholder chunk for "int x" |
||
4711 | * - an Optional chunk containing the remaining defaulted arguments, e.g., |
||
4712 | * - a Comma chunk for "," |
||
4713 | * - a Placeholder chunk for "float y" |
||
4714 | * - an Optional chunk containing the last defaulted argument: |
||
4715 | * - a Comma chunk for "," |
||
4716 | * - a Placeholder chunk for "double z" |
||
4717 | * - a RightParen chunk for ")" |
||
4718 | * |
||
4719 | * There are many ways to handle Optional chunks. Two simple approaches are: |
||
4720 | * - Completely ignore optional chunks, in which case the template for the |
||
4721 | * function "f" would only include the first parameter ("int x"). |
||
4722 | * - Fully expand all optional chunks, in which case the template for the |
||
4723 | * function "f" would have all of the parameters. |
||
4724 | */ |
||
4725 | CXCompletionChunk_Optional, |
||
4726 | /** |
||
4727 | * Text that a user would be expected to type to get this |
||
4728 | * code-completion result. |
||
4729 | * |
||
4730 | * There will be exactly one "typed text" chunk in a semantic string, which |
||
4731 | * will typically provide the spelling of a keyword or the name of a |
||
4732 | * declaration that could be used at the current code point. Clients are |
||
4733 | * expected to filter the code-completion results based on the text in this |
||
4734 | * chunk. |
||
4735 | */ |
||
4736 | CXCompletionChunk_TypedText, |
||
4737 | /** |
||
4738 | * Text that should be inserted as part of a code-completion result. |
||
4739 | * |
||
4740 | * A "text" chunk represents text that is part of the template to be |
||
4741 | * inserted into user code should this particular code-completion result |
||
4742 | * be selected. |
||
4743 | */ |
||
4744 | CXCompletionChunk_Text, |
||
4745 | /** |
||
4746 | * Placeholder text that should be replaced by the user. |
||
4747 | * |
||
4748 | * A "placeholder" chunk marks a place where the user should insert text |
||
4749 | * into the code-completion template. For example, placeholders might mark |
||
4750 | * the function parameters for a function declaration, to indicate that the |
||
4751 | * user should provide arguments for each of those parameters. The actual |
||
4752 | * text in a placeholder is a suggestion for the text to display before |
||
4753 | * the user replaces the placeholder with real code. |
||
4754 | */ |
||
4755 | CXCompletionChunk_Placeholder, |
||
4756 | /** |
||
4757 | * Informative text that should be displayed but never inserted as |
||
4758 | * part of the template. |
||
4759 | * |
||
4760 | * An "informative" chunk contains annotations that can be displayed to |
||
4761 | * help the user decide whether a particular code-completion result is the |
||
4762 | * right option, but which is not part of the actual template to be inserted |
||
4763 | * by code completion. |
||
4764 | */ |
||
4765 | CXCompletionChunk_Informative, |
||
4766 | /** |
||
4767 | * Text that describes the current parameter when code-completion is |
||
4768 | * referring to function call, message send, or template specialization. |
||
4769 | * |
||
4770 | * A "current parameter" chunk occurs when code-completion is providing |
||
4771 | * information about a parameter corresponding to the argument at the |
||
4772 | * code-completion point. For example, given a function |
||
4773 | * |
||
4774 | * \code |
||
4775 | * int add(int x, int y); |
||
4776 | * \endcode |
||
4777 | * |
||
4778 | * and the source code \c add(, where the code-completion point is after the |
||
4779 | * "(", the code-completion string will contain a "current parameter" chunk |
||
4780 | * for "int x", indicating that the current argument will initialize that |
||
4781 | * parameter. After typing further, to \c add(17, (where the code-completion |
||
4782 | * point is after the ","), the code-completion string will contain a |
||
4783 | * "current parameter" chunk to "int y". |
||
4784 | */ |
||
4785 | CXCompletionChunk_CurrentParameter, |
||
4786 | /** |
||
4787 | * A left parenthesis ('('), used to initiate a function call or |
||
4788 | * signal the beginning of a function parameter list. |
||
4789 | */ |
||
4790 | CXCompletionChunk_LeftParen, |
||
4791 | /** |
||
4792 | * A right parenthesis (')'), used to finish a function call or |
||
4793 | * signal the end of a function parameter list. |
||
4794 | */ |
||
4795 | CXCompletionChunk_RightParen, |
||
4796 | /** |
||
4797 | * A left bracket ('['). |
||
4798 | */ |
||
4799 | CXCompletionChunk_LeftBracket, |
||
4800 | /** |
||
4801 | * A right bracket (']'). |
||
4802 | */ |
||
4803 | CXCompletionChunk_RightBracket, |
||
4804 | /** |
||
4805 | * A left brace ('{'). |
||
4806 | */ |
||
4807 | CXCompletionChunk_LeftBrace, |
||
4808 | /** |
||
4809 | * A right brace ('}'). |
||
4810 | */ |
||
4811 | CXCompletionChunk_RightBrace, |
||
4812 | /** |
||
4813 | * A left angle bracket ('<'). |
||
4814 | */ |
||
4815 | CXCompletionChunk_LeftAngle, |
||
4816 | /** |
||
4817 | * A right angle bracket ('>'). |
||
4818 | */ |
||
4819 | CXCompletionChunk_RightAngle, |
||
4820 | /** |
||
4821 | * A comma separator (','). |
||
4822 | */ |
||
4823 | CXCompletionChunk_Comma, |
||
4824 | /** |
||
4825 | * Text that specifies the result type of a given result. |
||
4826 | * |
||
4827 | * This special kind of informative chunk is not meant to be inserted into |
||
4828 | * the text buffer. Rather, it is meant to illustrate the type that an |
||
4829 | * expression using the given completion string would have. |
||
4830 | */ |
||
4831 | CXCompletionChunk_ResultType, |
||
4832 | /** |
||
4833 | * A colon (':'). |
||
4834 | */ |
||
4835 | CXCompletionChunk_Colon, |
||
4836 | /** |
||
4837 | * A semicolon (';'). |
||
4838 | */ |
||
4839 | CXCompletionChunk_SemiColon, |
||
4840 | /** |
||
4841 | * An '=' sign. |
||
4842 | */ |
||
4843 | CXCompletionChunk_Equal, |
||
4844 | /** |
||
4845 | * Horizontal space (' '). |
||
4846 | */ |
||
4847 | CXCompletionChunk_HorizontalSpace, |
||
4848 | /** |
||
4849 | * Vertical space ('\\n'), after which it is generally a good idea to |
||
4850 | * perform indentation. |
||
4851 | */ |
||
4852 | CXCompletionChunk_VerticalSpace |
||
4853 | }; |
||
4854 | |||
4855 | /** |
||
4856 | * Determine the kind of a particular chunk within a completion string. |
||
4857 | * |
||
4858 | * \param completion_string the completion string to query. |
||
4859 | * |
||
4860 | * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string. |
||
4861 | * |
||
4862 | * \returns the kind of the chunk at the index \c chunk_number. |
||
4863 | */ |
||
4864 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCompletionChunkKind |
||
4865 | clang_getCompletionChunkKind(CXCompletionString completion_string, |
||
4866 | unsigned chunk_number); |
||
4867 | |||
4868 | /** |
||
4869 | * Retrieve the text associated with a particular chunk within a |
||
4870 | * completion string. |
||
4871 | * |
||
4872 | * \param completion_string the completion string to query. |
||
4873 | * |
||
4874 | * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string. |
||
4875 | * |
||
4876 | * \returns the text associated with the chunk at index \c chunk_number. |
||
4877 | */ |
||
4878 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCompletionChunkText( |
||
4879 | CXCompletionString completion_string, unsigned chunk_number); |
||
4880 | |||
4881 | /** |
||
4882 | * Retrieve the completion string associated with a particular chunk |
||
4883 | * within a completion string. |
||
4884 | * |
||
4885 | * \param completion_string the completion string to query. |
||
4886 | * |
||
4887 | * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string. |
||
4888 | * |
||
4889 | * \returns the completion string associated with the chunk at index |
||
4890 | * \c chunk_number. |
||
4891 | */ |
||
4892 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString( |
||
4893 | CXCompletionString completion_string, unsigned chunk_number); |
||
4894 | |||
4895 | /** |
||
4896 | * Retrieve the number of chunks in the given code-completion string. |
||
4897 | */ |
||
4898 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
||
4899 | clang_getNumCompletionChunks(CXCompletionString completion_string); |
||
4900 | |||
4901 | /** |
||
4902 | * Determine the priority of this code completion. |
||
4903 | * |
||
4904 | * The priority of a code completion indicates how likely it is that this |
||
4905 | * particular completion is the completion that the user will select. The |
||
4906 | * priority is selected by various internal heuristics. |
||
4907 | * |
||
4908 | * \param completion_string The completion string to query. |
||
4909 | * |
||
4910 | * \returns The priority of this completion string. Smaller values indicate |
||
4911 | * higher-priority (more likely) completions. |
||
4912 | */ |
||
4913 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
||
4914 | clang_getCompletionPriority(CXCompletionString completion_string); |
||
4915 | |||
4916 | /** |
||
4917 | * Determine the availability of the entity that this code-completion |
||
4918 | * string refers to. |
||
4919 | * |
||
4920 | * \param completion_string The completion string to query. |
||
4921 | * |
||
4922 | * \returns The availability of the completion string. |
||
4923 | */ |
||
4924 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind |
||
4925 | clang_getCompletionAvailability(CXCompletionString completion_string); |
||
4926 | |||
4927 | /** |
||
4928 | * Retrieve the number of annotations associated with the given |
||
4929 | * completion string. |
||
4930 | * |
||
4931 | * \param completion_string the completion string to query. |
||
4932 | * |
||
4933 | * \returns the number of annotations associated with the given completion |
||
4934 | * string. |
||
4935 | */ |
||
4936 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
||
4937 | clang_getCompletionNumAnnotations(CXCompletionString completion_string); |
||
4938 | |||
4939 | /** |
||
4940 | * Retrieve the annotation associated with the given completion string. |
||
4941 | * |
||
4942 | * \param completion_string the completion string to query. |
||
4943 | * |
||
4944 | * \param annotation_number the 0-based index of the annotation of the |
||
4945 | * completion string. |
||
4946 | * |
||
4947 | * \returns annotation string associated with the completion at index |
||
4948 | * \c annotation_number, or a NULL string if that annotation is not available. |
||
4949 | */ |
||
4950 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCompletionAnnotation( |
||
4951 | CXCompletionString completion_string, unsigned annotation_number); |
||
4952 | |||
4953 | /** |
||
4954 | * Retrieve the parent context of the given completion string. |
||
4955 | * |
||
4956 | * The parent context of a completion string is the semantic parent of |
||
4957 | * the declaration (if any) that the code completion represents. For example, |
||
4958 | * a code completion for an Objective-C method would have the method's class |
||
4959 | * or protocol as its context. |
||
4960 | * |
||
4961 | * \param completion_string The code completion string whose parent is |
||
4962 | * being queried. |
||
4963 | * |
||
4964 | * \param kind DEPRECATED: always set to CXCursor_NotImplemented if non-NULL. |
||
4965 | * |
||
4966 | * \returns The name of the completion parent, e.g., "NSObject" if |
||
4967 | * the completion string represents a method in the NSObject class. |
||
4968 | */ |
||
4969 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCompletionParent( |
||
4970 | CXCompletionString completion_string, enum CXCursorKind *kind); |
||
4971 | |||
4972 | /** |
||
4973 | * Retrieve the brief documentation comment attached to the declaration |
||
4974 | * that corresponds to the given completion string. |
||
4975 | */ |
||
4976 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString |
||
4977 | clang_getCompletionBriefComment(CXCompletionString completion_string); |
||
4978 | |||
4979 | /** |
||
4980 | * Retrieve a completion string for an arbitrary declaration or macro |
||
4981 | * definition cursor. |
||
4982 | * |
||
4983 | * \param cursor The cursor to query. |
||
4984 | * |
||
4985 | * \returns A non-context-sensitive completion string for declaration and macro |
||
4986 | * definition cursors, or NULL for other kinds of cursors. |
||
4987 | */ |
||
4988 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString |
||
4989 | clang_getCursorCompletionString(CXCursor cursor); |
||
4990 | |||
4991 | /** |
||
4992 | * Contains the results of code-completion. |
||
4993 | * |
||
4994 | * This data structure contains the results of code completion, as |
||
4995 | * produced by \c clang_codeCompleteAt(). Its contents must be freed by |
||
4996 | * \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults. |
||
4997 | */ |
||
4998 | typedef struct { |
||
4999 | /** |
||
5000 | * The code-completion results. |
||
5001 | */ |
||
5002 | CXCompletionResult *Results; |
||
5003 | |||
5004 | /** |
||
5005 | * The number of code-completion results stored in the |
||
5006 | * \c Results array. |
||
5007 | */ |
||
5008 | unsigned NumResults; |
||
5009 | } CXCodeCompleteResults; |
||
5010 | |||
5011 | /** |
||
5012 | * Retrieve the number of fix-its for the given completion index. |
||
5013 | * |
||
5014 | * Calling this makes sense only if CXCodeComplete_IncludeCompletionsWithFixIts |
||
5015 | * option was set. |
||
5016 | * |
||
5017 | * \param results The structure keeping all completion results |
||
5018 | * |
||
5019 | * \param completion_index The index of the completion |
||
5020 | * |
||
5021 | * \return The number of fix-its which must be applied before the completion at |
||
5022 | * completion_index can be applied |
||
5023 | */ |
||
5024 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
||
5025 | clang_getCompletionNumFixIts(CXCodeCompleteResults *results, |
||
5026 | unsigned completion_index); |
||
5027 | |||
5028 | /** |
||
5029 | * Fix-its that *must* be applied before inserting the text for the |
||
5030 | * corresponding completion. |
||
5031 | * |
||
5032 | * By default, clang_codeCompleteAt() only returns completions with empty |
||
5033 | * fix-its. Extra completions with non-empty fix-its should be explicitly |
||
5034 | * requested by setting CXCodeComplete_IncludeCompletionsWithFixIts. |
||
5035 | * |
||
5036 | * For the clients to be able to compute position of the cursor after applying |
||
5037 | * fix-its, the following conditions are guaranteed to hold for |
||
5038 | * replacement_range of the stored fix-its: |
||
5039 | * - Ranges in the fix-its are guaranteed to never contain the completion |
||
5040 | * point (or identifier under completion point, if any) inside them, except |
||
5041 | * at the start or at the end of the range. |
||
5042 | * - If a fix-it range starts or ends with completion point (or starts or |
||
5043 | * ends after the identifier under completion point), it will contain at |
||
5044 | * least one character. It allows to unambiguously recompute completion |
||
5045 | * point after applying the fix-it. |
||
5046 | * |
||
5047 | * The intuition is that provided fix-its change code around the identifier we |
||
5048 | * complete, but are not allowed to touch the identifier itself or the |
||
5049 | * completion point. One example of completions with corrections are the ones |
||
5050 | * replacing '.' with '->' and vice versa: |
||
5051 | * |
||
5052 | * std::unique_ptr<std::vector<int>> vec_ptr; |
||
5053 | * In 'vec_ptr.^', one of the completions is 'push_back', it requires |
||
5054 | * replacing '.' with '->'. |
||
5055 | * In 'vec_ptr->^', one of the completions is 'release', it requires |
||
5056 | * replacing '->' with '.'. |
||
5057 | * |
||
5058 | * \param results The structure keeping all completion results |
||
5059 | * |
||
5060 | * \param completion_index The index of the completion |
||
5061 | * |
||
5062 | * \param fixit_index The index of the fix-it for the completion at |
||
5063 | * completion_index |
||
5064 | * |
||
5065 | * \param replacement_range The fix-it range that must be replaced before the |
||
5066 | * completion at completion_index can be applied |
||
5067 | * |
||
5068 | * \returns The fix-it string that must replace the code at replacement_range |
||
5069 | * before the completion at completion_index can be applied |
||
5070 | */ |
||
5071 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCompletionFixIt( |
||
5072 | CXCodeCompleteResults *results, unsigned completion_index, |
||
5073 | unsigned fixit_index, CXSourceRange *replacement_range); |
||
5074 | |||
5075 | /** |
||
5076 | * Flags that can be passed to \c clang_codeCompleteAt() to |
||
5077 | * modify its behavior. |
||
5078 | * |
||
5079 | * The enumerators in this enumeration can be bitwise-OR'd together to |
||
5080 | * provide multiple options to \c clang_codeCompleteAt(). |
||
5081 | */ |
||
5082 | enum CXCodeComplete_Flags { |
||
5083 | /** |
||
5084 | * Whether to include macros within the set of code |
||
5085 | * completions returned. |
||
5086 | */ |
||
5087 | CXCodeComplete_IncludeMacros = 0x01, |
||
5088 | |||
5089 | /** |
||
5090 | * Whether to include code patterns for language constructs |
||
5091 | * within the set of code completions, e.g., for loops. |
||
5092 | */ |
||
5093 | CXCodeComplete_IncludeCodePatterns = 0x02, |
||
5094 | |||
5095 | /** |
||
5096 | * Whether to include brief documentation within the set of code |
||
5097 | * completions returned. |
||
5098 | */ |
||
5099 | CXCodeComplete_IncludeBriefComments = 0x04, |
||
5100 | |||
5101 | /** |
||
5102 | * Whether to speed up completion by omitting top- or namespace-level entities |
||
5103 | * defined in the preamble. There's no guarantee any particular entity is |
||
5104 | * omitted. This may be useful if the headers are indexed externally. |
||
5105 | */ |
||
5106 | CXCodeComplete_SkipPreamble = 0x08, |
||
5107 | |||
5108 | /** |
||
5109 | * Whether to include completions with small |
||
5110 | * fix-its, e.g. change '.' to '->' on member access, etc. |
||
5111 | */ |
||
5112 | CXCodeComplete_IncludeCompletionsWithFixIts = 0x10 |
||
5113 | }; |
||
5114 | |||
5115 | /** |
||
5116 | * Bits that represent the context under which completion is occurring. |
||
5117 | * |
||
5118 | * The enumerators in this enumeration may be bitwise-OR'd together if multiple |
||
5119 | * contexts are occurring simultaneously. |
||
5120 | */ |
||
5121 | enum CXCompletionContext { |
||
5122 | /** |
||
5123 | * The context for completions is unexposed, as only Clang results |
||
5124 | * should be included. (This is equivalent to having no context bits set.) |
||
5125 | */ |
||
5126 | CXCompletionContext_Unexposed = 0, |
||
5127 | |||
5128 | /** |
||
5129 | * Completions for any possible type should be included in the results. |
||
5130 | */ |
||
5131 | CXCompletionContext_AnyType = 1 << 0, |
||
5132 | |||
5133 | /** |
||
5134 | * Completions for any possible value (variables, function calls, etc.) |
||
5135 | * should be included in the results. |
||
5136 | */ |
||
5137 | CXCompletionContext_AnyValue = 1 << 1, |
||
5138 | /** |
||
5139 | * Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C object should |
||
5140 | * be included in the results. |
||
5141 | */ |
||
5142 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCObjectValue = 1 << 2, |
||
5143 | /** |
||
5144 | * Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C selector |
||
5145 | * should be included in the results. |
||
5146 | */ |
||
5147 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorValue = 1 << 3, |
||
5148 | /** |
||
5149 | * Completions for values that resolve to a C++ class type should be |
||
5150 | * included in the results. |
||
5151 | */ |
||
5152 | CXCompletionContext_CXXClassTypeValue = 1 << 4, |
||
5153 | |||
5154 | /** |
||
5155 | * Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the dot |
||
5156 | * operator should be included in the results. |
||
5157 | */ |
||
5158 | CXCompletionContext_DotMemberAccess = 1 << 5, |
||
5159 | /** |
||
5160 | * Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the arrow |
||
5161 | * operator should be included in the results. |
||
5162 | */ |
||
5163 | CXCompletionContext_ArrowMemberAccess = 1 << 6, |
||
5164 | /** |
||
5165 | * Completions for properties of the Objective-C object being accessed |
||
5166 | * using the dot operator should be included in the results. |
||
5167 | */ |
||
5168 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCPropertyAccess = 1 << 7, |
||
5169 | |||
5170 | /** |
||
5171 | * Completions for enum tags should be included in the results. |
||
5172 | */ |
||
5173 | CXCompletionContext_EnumTag = 1 << 8, |
||
5174 | /** |
||
5175 | * Completions for union tags should be included in the results. |
||
5176 | */ |
||
5177 | CXCompletionContext_UnionTag = 1 << 9, |
||
5178 | /** |
||
5179 | * Completions for struct tags should be included in the results. |
||
5180 | */ |
||
5181 | CXCompletionContext_StructTag = 1 << 10, |
||
5182 | |||
5183 | /** |
||
5184 | * Completions for C++ class names should be included in the results. |
||
5185 | */ |
||
5186 | CXCompletionContext_ClassTag = 1 << 11, |
||
5187 | /** |
||
5188 | * Completions for C++ namespaces and namespace aliases should be |
||
5189 | * included in the results. |
||
5190 | */ |
||
5191 | CXCompletionContext_Namespace = 1 << 12, |
||
5192 | /** |
||
5193 | * Completions for C++ nested name specifiers should be included in |
||
5194 | * the results. |
||
5195 | */ |
||
5196 | CXCompletionContext_NestedNameSpecifier = 1 << 13, |
||
5197 | |||
5198 | /** |
||
5199 | * Completions for Objective-C interfaces (classes) should be included |
||
5200 | * in the results. |
||
5201 | */ |
||
5202 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCInterface = 1 << 14, |
||
5203 | /** |
||
5204 | * Completions for Objective-C protocols should be included in |
||
5205 | * the results. |
||
5206 | */ |
||
5207 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCProtocol = 1 << 15, |
||
5208 | /** |
||
5209 | * Completions for Objective-C categories should be included in |
||
5210 | * the results. |
||
5211 | */ |
||
5212 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCCategory = 1 << 16, |
||
5213 | /** |
||
5214 | * Completions for Objective-C instance messages should be included |
||
5215 | * in the results. |
||
5216 | */ |
||
5217 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage = 1 << 17, |
||
5218 | /** |
||
5219 | * Completions for Objective-C class messages should be included in |
||
5220 | * the results. |
||
5221 | */ |
||
5222 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage = 1 << 18, |
||
5223 | /** |
||
5224 | * Completions for Objective-C selector names should be included in |
||
5225 | * the results. |
||
5226 | */ |
||
5227 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorName = 1 << 19, |
||
5228 | |||
5229 | /** |
||
5230 | * Completions for preprocessor macro names should be included in |
||
5231 | * the results. |
||
5232 | */ |
||
5233 | CXCompletionContext_MacroName = 1 << 20, |
||
5234 | |||
5235 | /** |
||
5236 | * Natural language completions should be included in the results. |
||
5237 | */ |
||
5238 | CXCompletionContext_NaturalLanguage = 1 << 21, |
||
5239 | |||
5240 | /** |
||
5241 | * #include file completions should be included in the results. |
||
5242 | */ |
||
5243 | CXCompletionContext_IncludedFile = 1 << 22, |
||
5244 | |||
5245 | /** |
||
5246 | * The current context is unknown, so set all contexts. |
||
5247 | */ |
||
5248 | CXCompletionContext_Unknown = ((1 << 23) - 1) |
||
5249 | }; |
||
5250 | |||
5251 | /** |
||
5252 | * Returns a default set of code-completion options that can be |
||
5253 | * passed to\c clang_codeCompleteAt(). |
||
5254 | */ |
||
5255 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions(void); |
||
5256 | |||
5257 | /** |
||
5258 | * Perform code completion at a given location in a translation unit. |
||
5259 | * |
||
5260 | * This function performs code completion at a particular file, line, and |
||
5261 | * column within source code, providing results that suggest potential |
||
5262 | * code snippets based on the context of the completion. The basic model |
||
5263 | * for code completion is that Clang will parse a complete source file, |
||
5264 | * performing syntax checking up to the location where code-completion has |
||
5265 | * been requested. At that point, a special code-completion token is passed |
||
5266 | * to the parser, which recognizes this token and determines, based on the |
||
5267 | * current location in the C/Objective-C/C++ grammar and the state of |
||
5268 | * semantic analysis, what completions to provide. These completions are |
||
5269 | * returned via a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure. |
||
5270 | * |
||
5271 | * Code completion itself is meant to be triggered by the client when the |
||
5272 | * user types punctuation characters or whitespace, at which point the |
||
5273 | * code-completion location will coincide with the cursor. For example, if \c p |
||
5274 | * is a pointer, code-completion might be triggered after the "-" and then |
||
5275 | * after the ">" in \c p->. When the code-completion location is after the ">", |
||
5276 | * the completion results will provide, e.g., the members of the struct that |
||
5277 | * "p" points to. The client is responsible for placing the cursor at the |
||
5278 | * beginning of the token currently being typed, then filtering the results |
||
5279 | * based on the contents of the token. For example, when code-completing for |
||
5280 | * the expression \c p->get, the client should provide the location just after |
||
5281 | * the ">" (e.g., pointing at the "g") to this code-completion hook. Then, the |
||
5282 | * client can filter the results based on the current token text ("get"), only |
||
5283 | * showing those results that start with "get". The intent of this interface |
||
5284 | * is to separate the relatively high-latency acquisition of code-completion |
||
5285 | * results from the filtering of results on a per-character basis, which must |
||
5286 | * have a lower latency. |
||
5287 | * |
||
5288 | * \param TU The translation unit in which code-completion should |
||
5289 | * occur. The source files for this translation unit need not be |
||
5290 | * completely up-to-date (and the contents of those source files may |
||
5291 | * be overridden via \p unsaved_files). Cursors referring into the |
||
5292 | * translation unit may be invalidated by this invocation. |
||
5293 | * |
||
5294 | * \param complete_filename The name of the source file where code |
||
5295 | * completion should be performed. This filename may be any file |
||
5296 | * included in the translation unit. |
||
5297 | * |
||
5298 | * \param complete_line The line at which code-completion should occur. |
||
5299 | * |
||
5300 | * \param complete_column The column at which code-completion should occur. |
||
5301 | * Note that the column should point just after the syntactic construct that |
||
5302 | * initiated code completion, and not in the middle of a lexical token. |
||
5303 | * |
||
5304 | * \param unsaved_files the Files that have not yet been saved to disk |
||
5305 | * but may be required for parsing or code completion, including the |
||
5306 | * contents of those files. The contents and name of these files (as |
||
5307 | * specified by CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the |
||
5308 | * client only needs to guarantee their validity until the call to |
||
5309 | * this function returns. |
||
5310 | * |
||
5311 | * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p |
||
5312 | * unsaved_files. |
||
5313 | * |
||
5314 | * \param options Extra options that control the behavior of code |
||
5315 | * completion, expressed as a bitwise OR of the enumerators of the |
||
5316 | * CXCodeComplete_Flags enumeration. The |
||
5317 | * \c clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions() function returns a default set |
||
5318 | * of code-completion options. |
||
5319 | * |
||
5320 | * \returns If successful, a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure |
||
5321 | * containing code-completion results, which should eventually be |
||
5322 | * freed with \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(). If code |
||
5323 | * completion fails, returns NULL. |
||
5324 | */ |
||
5325 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
5326 | CXCodeCompleteResults * |
||
5327 | clang_codeCompleteAt(CXTranslationUnit TU, const char *complete_filename, |
||
5328 | unsigned complete_line, unsigned complete_column, |
||
5329 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, |
||
5330 | unsigned num_unsaved_files, unsigned options); |
||
5331 | |||
5332 | /** |
||
5333 | * Sort the code-completion results in case-insensitive alphabetical |
||
5334 | * order. |
||
5335 | * |
||
5336 | * \param Results The set of results to sort. |
||
5337 | * \param NumResults The number of results in \p Results. |
||
5338 | */ |
||
5339 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
5340 | void clang_sortCodeCompletionResults(CXCompletionResult *Results, |
||
5341 | unsigned NumResults); |
||
5342 | |||
5343 | /** |
||
5344 | * Free the given set of code-completion results. |
||
5345 | */ |
||
5346 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
5347 | void clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results); |
||
5348 | |||
5349 | /** |
||
5350 | * Determine the number of diagnostics produced prior to the |
||
5351 | * location where code completion was performed. |
||
5352 | */ |
||
5353 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
5354 | unsigned clang_codeCompleteGetNumDiagnostics(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results); |
||
5355 | |||
5356 | /** |
||
5357 | * Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given code completion. |
||
5358 | * |
||
5359 | * \param Results the code completion results to query. |
||
5360 | * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve. |
||
5361 | * |
||
5362 | * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed |
||
5363 | * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic(). |
||
5364 | */ |
||
5365 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
5366 | CXDiagnostic clang_codeCompleteGetDiagnostic(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results, |
||
5367 | unsigned Index); |
||
5368 | |||
5369 | /** |
||
5370 | * Determines what completions are appropriate for the context |
||
5371 | * the given code completion. |
||
5372 | * |
||
5373 | * \param Results the code completion results to query |
||
5374 | * |
||
5375 | * \returns the kinds of completions that are appropriate for use |
||
5376 | * along with the given code completion results. |
||
5377 | */ |
||
5378 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
5379 | unsigned long long |
||
5380 | clang_codeCompleteGetContexts(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results); |
||
5381 | |||
5382 | /** |
||
5383 | * Returns the cursor kind for the container for the current code |
||
5384 | * completion context. The container is only guaranteed to be set for |
||
5385 | * contexts where a container exists (i.e. member accesses or Objective-C |
||
5386 | * message sends); if there is not a container, this function will return |
||
5387 | * CXCursor_InvalidCode. |
||
5388 | * |
||
5389 | * \param Results the code completion results to query |
||
5390 | * |
||
5391 | * \param IsIncomplete on return, this value will be false if Clang has complete |
||
5392 | * information about the container. If Clang does not have complete |
||
5393 | * information, this value will be true. |
||
5394 | * |
||
5395 | * \returns the container kind, or CXCursor_InvalidCode if there is not a |
||
5396 | * container |
||
5397 | */ |
||
5398 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
5399 | enum CXCursorKind |
||
5400 | clang_codeCompleteGetContainerKind(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results, |
||
5401 | unsigned *IsIncomplete); |
||
5402 | |||
5403 | /** |
||
5404 | * Returns the USR for the container for the current code completion |
||
5405 | * context. If there is not a container for the current context, this |
||
5406 | * function will return the empty string. |
||
5407 | * |
||
5408 | * \param Results the code completion results to query |
||
5409 | * |
||
5410 | * \returns the USR for the container |
||
5411 | */ |
||
5412 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
5413 | CXString clang_codeCompleteGetContainerUSR(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results); |
||
5414 | |||
5415 | /** |
||
5416 | * Returns the currently-entered selector for an Objective-C message |
||
5417 | * send, formatted like "initWithFoo:bar:". Only guaranteed to return a |
||
5418 | * non-empty string for CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage and |
||
5419 | * CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage. |
||
5420 | * |
||
5421 | * \param Results the code completion results to query |
||
5422 | * |
||
5423 | * \returns the selector (or partial selector) that has been entered thus far |
||
5424 | * for an Objective-C message send. |
||
5425 | */ |
||
5426 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
5427 | CXString clang_codeCompleteGetObjCSelector(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results); |
||
5428 | |||
5429 | /** |
||
5430 | * @} |
||
5431 | */ |
||
5432 | |||
5433 | /** |
||
5434 | * \defgroup CINDEX_MISC Miscellaneous utility functions |
||
5435 | * |
||
5436 | * @{ |
||
5437 | */ |
||
5438 | |||
5439 | /** |
||
5440 | * Return a version string, suitable for showing to a user, but not |
||
5441 | * intended to be parsed (the format is not guaranteed to be stable). |
||
5442 | */ |
||
5443 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getClangVersion(void); |
||
5444 | |||
5445 | /** |
||
5446 | * Enable/disable crash recovery. |
||
5447 | * |
||
5448 | * \param isEnabled Flag to indicate if crash recovery is enabled. A non-zero |
||
5449 | * value enables crash recovery, while 0 disables it. |
||
5450 | */ |
||
5451 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_toggleCrashRecovery(unsigned isEnabled); |
||
5452 | |||
5453 | /** |
||
5454 | * Visitor invoked for each file in a translation unit |
||
5455 | * (used with clang_getInclusions()). |
||
5456 | * |
||
5457 | * This visitor function will be invoked by clang_getInclusions() for each |
||
5458 | * file included (either at the top-level or by \#include directives) within |
||
5459 | * a translation unit. The first argument is the file being included, and |
||
5460 | * the second and third arguments provide the inclusion stack. The |
||
5461 | * array is sorted in order of immediate inclusion. For example, |
||
5462 | * the first element refers to the location that included 'included_file'. |
||
5463 | */ |
||
5464 | typedef void (*CXInclusionVisitor)(CXFile included_file, |
||
5465 | CXSourceLocation *inclusion_stack, |
||
5466 | unsigned include_len, |
||
5467 | CXClientData client_data); |
||
5468 | |||
5469 | /** |
||
5470 | * Visit the set of preprocessor inclusions in a translation unit. |
||
5471 | * The visitor function is called with the provided data for every included |
||
5472 | * file. This does not include headers included by the PCH file (unless one |
||
5473 | * is inspecting the inclusions in the PCH file itself). |
||
5474 | */ |
||
5475 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInclusions(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
||
5476 | CXInclusionVisitor visitor, |
||
5477 | CXClientData client_data); |
||
5478 | |||
5479 | typedef enum { |
||
5480 | CXEval_Int = 1, |
||
5481 | CXEval_Float = 2, |
||
5482 | CXEval_ObjCStrLiteral = 3, |
||
5483 | CXEval_StrLiteral = 4, |
||
5484 | CXEval_CFStr = 5, |
||
5485 | CXEval_Other = 6, |
||
5486 | |||
5487 | CXEval_UnExposed = 0 |
||
5488 | |||
5489 | } CXEvalResultKind; |
||
5490 | |||
5491 | /** |
||
5492 | * Evaluation result of a cursor |
||
5493 | */ |
||
5494 | typedef void *CXEvalResult; |
||
5495 | |||
5496 | /** |
||
5497 | * If cursor is a statement declaration tries to evaluate the |
||
5498 | * statement and if its variable, tries to evaluate its initializer, |
||
5499 | * into its corresponding type. |
||
5500 | * If it's an expression, tries to evaluate the expression. |
||
5501 | */ |
||
5502 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXEvalResult clang_Cursor_Evaluate(CXCursor C); |
||
5503 | |||
5504 | /** |
||
5505 | * Returns the kind of the evaluated result. |
||
5506 | */ |
||
5507 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXEvalResultKind clang_EvalResult_getKind(CXEvalResult E); |
||
5508 | |||
5509 | /** |
||
5510 | * Returns the evaluation result as integer if the |
||
5511 | * kind is Int. |
||
5512 | */ |
||
5513 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_EvalResult_getAsInt(CXEvalResult E); |
||
5514 | |||
5515 | /** |
||
5516 | * Returns the evaluation result as a long long integer if the |
||
5517 | * kind is Int. This prevents overflows that may happen if the result is |
||
5518 | * returned with clang_EvalResult_getAsInt. |
||
5519 | */ |
||
5520 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_EvalResult_getAsLongLong(CXEvalResult E); |
||
5521 | |||
5522 | /** |
||
5523 | * Returns a non-zero value if the kind is Int and the evaluation |
||
5524 | * result resulted in an unsigned integer. |
||
5525 | */ |
||
5526 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_EvalResult_isUnsignedInt(CXEvalResult E); |
||
5527 | |||
5528 | /** |
||
5529 | * Returns the evaluation result as an unsigned integer if |
||
5530 | * the kind is Int and clang_EvalResult_isUnsignedInt is non-zero. |
||
5531 | */ |
||
5532 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long |
||
5533 | clang_EvalResult_getAsUnsigned(CXEvalResult E); |
||
5534 | |||
5535 | /** |
||
5536 | * Returns the evaluation result as double if the |
||
5537 | * kind is double. |
||
5538 | */ |
||
5539 | CINDEX_LINKAGE double clang_EvalResult_getAsDouble(CXEvalResult E); |
||
5540 | |||
5541 | /** |
||
5542 | * Returns the evaluation result as a constant string if the |
||
5543 | * kind is other than Int or float. User must not free this pointer, |
||
5544 | * instead call clang_EvalResult_dispose on the CXEvalResult returned |
||
5545 | * by clang_Cursor_Evaluate. |
||
5546 | */ |
||
5547 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const char *clang_EvalResult_getAsStr(CXEvalResult E); |
||
5548 | |||
5549 | /** |
||
5550 | * Disposes the created Eval memory. |
||
5551 | */ |
||
5552 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_EvalResult_dispose(CXEvalResult E); |
||
5553 | /** |
||
5554 | * @} |
||
5555 | */ |
||
5556 | |||
5557 | /** \defgroup CINDEX_REMAPPING Remapping functions |
||
5558 | * |
||
5559 | * @{ |
||
5560 | */ |
||
5561 | |||
5562 | /** |
||
5563 | * A remapping of original source files and their translated files. |
||
5564 | */ |
||
5565 | typedef void *CXRemapping; |
||
5566 | |||
5567 | /** |
||
5568 | * Retrieve a remapping. |
||
5569 | * |
||
5570 | * \param path the path that contains metadata about remappings. |
||
5571 | * |
||
5572 | * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed |
||
5573 | * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred. |
||
5574 | */ |
||
5575 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXRemapping clang_getRemappings(const char *path); |
||
5576 | |||
5577 | /** |
||
5578 | * Retrieve a remapping. |
||
5579 | * |
||
5580 | * \param filePaths pointer to an array of file paths containing remapping info. |
||
5581 | * |
||
5582 | * \param numFiles number of file paths. |
||
5583 | * |
||
5584 | * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed |
||
5585 | * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred. |
||
5586 | */ |
||
5587 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
5588 | CXRemapping clang_getRemappingsFromFileList(const char **filePaths, |
||
5589 | unsigned numFiles); |
||
5590 | |||
5591 | /** |
||
5592 | * Determine the number of remappings. |
||
5593 | */ |
||
5594 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_remap_getNumFiles(CXRemapping); |
||
5595 | |||
5596 | /** |
||
5597 | * Get the original and the associated filename from the remapping. |
||
5598 | * |
||
5599 | * \param original If non-NULL, will be set to the original filename. |
||
5600 | * |
||
5601 | * \param transformed If non-NULL, will be set to the filename that the original |
||
5602 | * is associated with. |
||
5603 | */ |
||
5604 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_getFilenames(CXRemapping, unsigned index, |
||
5605 | CXString *original, |
||
5606 | CXString *transformed); |
||
5607 | |||
5608 | /** |
||
5609 | * Dispose the remapping. |
||
5610 | */ |
||
5611 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_dispose(CXRemapping); |
||
5612 | |||
5613 | /** |
||
5614 | * @} |
||
5615 | */ |
||
5616 | |||
5617 | /** \defgroup CINDEX_HIGH Higher level API functions |
||
5618 | * |
||
5619 | * @{ |
||
5620 | */ |
||
5621 | |||
5622 | enum CXVisitorResult { CXVisit_Break, CXVisit_Continue }; |
||
5623 | |||
5624 | typedef struct CXCursorAndRangeVisitor { |
||
5625 | void *context; |
||
5626 | enum CXVisitorResult (*visit)(void *context, CXCursor, CXSourceRange); |
||
5627 | } CXCursorAndRangeVisitor; |
||
5628 | |||
5629 | typedef enum { |
||
5630 | /** |
||
5631 | * Function returned successfully. |
||
5632 | */ |
||
5633 | CXResult_Success = 0, |
||
5634 | /** |
||
5635 | * One of the parameters was invalid for the function. |
||
5636 | */ |
||
5637 | CXResult_Invalid = 1, |
||
5638 | /** |
||
5639 | * The function was terminated by a callback (e.g. it returned |
||
5640 | * CXVisit_Break) |
||
5641 | */ |
||
5642 | CXResult_VisitBreak = 2 |
||
5643 | |||
5644 | } CXResult; |
||
5645 | |||
5646 | /** |
||
5647 | * Find references of a declaration in a specific file. |
||
5648 | * |
||
5649 | * \param cursor pointing to a declaration or a reference of one. |
||
5650 | * |
||
5651 | * \param file to search for references. |
||
5652 | * |
||
5653 | * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for |
||
5654 | * each reference found. |
||
5655 | * The CXSourceRange will point inside the file; if the reference is inside |
||
5656 | * a macro (and not a macro argument) the CXSourceRange will be invalid. |
||
5657 | * |
||
5658 | * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators. |
||
5659 | */ |
||
5660 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findReferencesInFile( |
||
5661 | CXCursor cursor, CXFile file, CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor); |
||
5662 | |||
5663 | /** |
||
5664 | * Find #import/#include directives in a specific file. |
||
5665 | * |
||
5666 | * \param TU translation unit containing the file to query. |
||
5667 | * |
||
5668 | * \param file to search for #import/#include directives. |
||
5669 | * |
||
5670 | * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for |
||
5671 | * each directive found. |
||
5672 | * |
||
5673 | * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators. |
||
5674 | */ |
||
5675 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findIncludesInFile( |
||
5676 | CXTranslationUnit TU, CXFile file, CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor); |
||
5677 | |||
5678 | #ifdef __has_feature |
||
5679 | #if __has_feature(blocks) |
||
5680 | |||
5681 | typedef enum CXVisitorResult (^CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock)(CXCursor, |
||
5682 | CXSourceRange); |
||
5683 | |||
5684 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
5685 | CXResult clang_findReferencesInFileWithBlock(CXCursor, CXFile, |
||
5686 | CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock); |
||
5687 | |||
5688 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
5689 | CXResult clang_findIncludesInFileWithBlock(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile, |
||
5690 | CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock); |
||
5691 | |||
5692 | #endif |
||
5693 | #endif |
||
5694 | |||
5695 | /** |
||
5696 | * The client's data object that is associated with a CXFile. |
||
5697 | */ |
||
5698 | typedef void *CXIdxClientFile; |
||
5699 | |||
5700 | /** |
||
5701 | * The client's data object that is associated with a semantic entity. |
||
5702 | */ |
||
5703 | typedef void *CXIdxClientEntity; |
||
5704 | |||
5705 | /** |
||
5706 | * The client's data object that is associated with a semantic container |
||
5707 | * of entities. |
||
5708 | */ |
||
5709 | typedef void *CXIdxClientContainer; |
||
5710 | |||
5711 | /** |
||
5712 | * The client's data object that is associated with an AST file (PCH |
||
5713 | * or module). |
||
5714 | */ |
||
5715 | typedef void *CXIdxClientASTFile; |
||
5716 | |||
5717 | /** |
||
5718 | * Source location passed to index callbacks. |
||
5719 | */ |
||
5720 | typedef struct { |
||
5721 | void *ptr_data[2]; |
||
5722 | unsigned int_data; |
||
5723 | } CXIdxLoc; |
||
5724 | |||
5725 | /** |
||
5726 | * Data for ppIncludedFile callback. |
||
5727 | */ |
||
5728 | typedef struct { |
||
5729 | /** |
||
5730 | * Location of '#' in the \#include/\#import directive. |
||
5731 | */ |
||
5732 | CXIdxLoc hashLoc; |
||
5733 | /** |
||
5734 | * Filename as written in the \#include/\#import directive. |
||
5735 | */ |
||
5736 | const char *filename; |
||
5737 | /** |
||
5738 | * The actual file that the \#include/\#import directive resolved to. |
||
5739 | */ |
||
5740 | CXFile file; |
||
5741 | int isImport; |
||
5742 | int isAngled; |
||
5743 | /** |
||
5744 | * Non-zero if the directive was automatically turned into a module |
||
5745 | * import. |
||
5746 | */ |
||
5747 | int isModuleImport; |
||
5748 | } CXIdxIncludedFileInfo; |
||
5749 | |||
5750 | /** |
||
5751 | * Data for IndexerCallbacks#importedASTFile. |
||
5752 | */ |
||
5753 | typedef struct { |
||
5754 | /** |
||
5755 | * Top level AST file containing the imported PCH, module or submodule. |
||
5756 | */ |
||
5757 | CXFile file; |
||
5758 | /** |
||
5759 | * The imported module or NULL if the AST file is a PCH. |
||
5760 | */ |
||
5761 | CXModule module; |
||
5762 | /** |
||
5763 | * Location where the file is imported. Applicable only for modules. |
||
5764 | */ |
||
5765 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
||
5766 | /** |
||
5767 | * Non-zero if an inclusion directive was automatically turned into |
||
5768 | * a module import. Applicable only for modules. |
||
5769 | */ |
||
5770 | int isImplicit; |
||
5771 | |||
5772 | } CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo; |
||
5773 | |||
5774 | typedef enum { |
||
5775 | CXIdxEntity_Unexposed = 0, |
||
5776 | CXIdxEntity_Typedef = 1, |
||
5777 | CXIdxEntity_Function = 2, |
||
5778 | CXIdxEntity_Variable = 3, |
||
5779 | CXIdxEntity_Field = 4, |
||
5780 | CXIdxEntity_EnumConstant = 5, |
||
5781 | |||
5782 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCClass = 6, |
||
5783 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCProtocol = 7, |
||
5784 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCCategory = 8, |
||
5785 | |||
5786 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCInstanceMethod = 9, |
||
5787 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCClassMethod = 10, |
||
5788 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCProperty = 11, |
||
5789 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCIvar = 12, |
||
5790 | |||
5791 | CXIdxEntity_Enum = 13, |
||
5792 | CXIdxEntity_Struct = 14, |
||
5793 | CXIdxEntity_Union = 15, |
||
5794 | |||
5795 | CXIdxEntity_CXXClass = 16, |
||
5796 | CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespace = 17, |
||
5797 | CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespaceAlias = 18, |
||
5798 | CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticVariable = 19, |
||
5799 | CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod = 20, |
||
5800 | CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod = 21, |
||
5801 | CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor = 22, |
||
5802 | CXIdxEntity_CXXDestructor = 23, |
||
5803 | CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction = 24, |
||
5804 | CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias = 25, |
||
5805 | CXIdxEntity_CXXInterface = 26, |
||
5806 | CXIdxEntity_CXXConcept = 27 |
||
5807 | |||
5808 | } CXIdxEntityKind; |
||
5809 | |||
5810 | typedef enum { |
||
5811 | CXIdxEntityLang_None = 0, |
||
5812 | CXIdxEntityLang_C = 1, |
||
5813 | CXIdxEntityLang_ObjC = 2, |
||
5814 | CXIdxEntityLang_CXX = 3, |
||
5815 | CXIdxEntityLang_Swift = 4 |
||
5816 | } CXIdxEntityLanguage; |
||
5817 | |||
5818 | /** |
||
5819 | * Extra C++ template information for an entity. This can apply to: |
||
5820 | * CXIdxEntity_Function |
||
5821 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXClass |
||
5822 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod |
||
5823 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod |
||
5824 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor |
||
5825 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction |
||
5826 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias |
||
5827 | */ |
||
5828 | typedef enum { |
||
5829 | CXIdxEntity_NonTemplate = 0, |
||
5830 | CXIdxEntity_Template = 1, |
||
5831 | CXIdxEntity_TemplatePartialSpecialization = 2, |
||
5832 | CXIdxEntity_TemplateSpecialization = 3 |
||
5833 | } CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind; |
||
5834 | |||
5835 | typedef enum { |
||
5836 | CXIdxAttr_Unexposed = 0, |
||
5837 | CXIdxAttr_IBAction = 1, |
||
5838 | CXIdxAttr_IBOutlet = 2, |
||
5839 | CXIdxAttr_IBOutletCollection = 3 |
||
5840 | } CXIdxAttrKind; |
||
5841 | |||
5842 | typedef struct { |
||
5843 | CXIdxAttrKind kind; |
||
5844 | CXCursor cursor; |
||
5845 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
||
5846 | } CXIdxAttrInfo; |
||
5847 | |||
5848 | typedef struct { |
||
5849 | CXIdxEntityKind kind; |
||
5850 | CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind templateKind; |
||
5851 | CXIdxEntityLanguage lang; |
||
5852 | const char *name; |
||
5853 | const char *USR; |
||
5854 | CXCursor cursor; |
||
5855 | const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes; |
||
5856 | unsigned numAttributes; |
||
5857 | } CXIdxEntityInfo; |
||
5858 | |||
5859 | typedef struct { |
||
5860 | CXCursor cursor; |
||
5861 | } CXIdxContainerInfo; |
||
5862 | |||
5863 | typedef struct { |
||
5864 | const CXIdxAttrInfo *attrInfo; |
||
5865 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass; |
||
5866 | CXCursor classCursor; |
||
5867 | CXIdxLoc classLoc; |
||
5868 | } CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo; |
||
5869 | |||
5870 | typedef enum { CXIdxDeclFlag_Skipped = 0x1 } CXIdxDeclInfoFlags; |
||
5871 | |||
5872 | typedef struct { |
||
5873 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *entityInfo; |
||
5874 | CXCursor cursor; |
||
5875 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
||
5876 | const CXIdxContainerInfo *semanticContainer; |
||
5877 | /** |
||
5878 | * Generally same as #semanticContainer but can be different in |
||
5879 | * cases like out-of-line C++ member functions. |
||
5880 | */ |
||
5881 | const CXIdxContainerInfo *lexicalContainer; |
||
5882 | int isRedeclaration; |
||
5883 | int isDefinition; |
||
5884 | int isContainer; |
||
5885 | const CXIdxContainerInfo *declAsContainer; |
||
5886 | /** |
||
5887 | * Whether the declaration exists in code or was created implicitly |
||
5888 | * by the compiler, e.g. implicit Objective-C methods for properties. |
||
5889 | */ |
||
5890 | int isImplicit; |
||
5891 | const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes; |
||
5892 | unsigned numAttributes; |
||
5893 | |||
5894 | unsigned flags; |
||
5895 | |||
5896 | } CXIdxDeclInfo; |
||
5897 | |||
5898 | typedef enum { |
||
5899 | CXIdxObjCContainer_ForwardRef = 0, |
||
5900 | CXIdxObjCContainer_Interface = 1, |
||
5901 | CXIdxObjCContainer_Implementation = 2 |
||
5902 | } CXIdxObjCContainerKind; |
||
5903 | |||
5904 | typedef struct { |
||
5905 | const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo; |
||
5906 | CXIdxObjCContainerKind kind; |
||
5907 | } CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo; |
||
5908 | |||
5909 | typedef struct { |
||
5910 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *base; |
||
5911 | CXCursor cursor; |
||
5912 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
||
5913 | } CXIdxBaseClassInfo; |
||
5914 | |||
5915 | typedef struct { |
||
5916 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *protocol; |
||
5917 | CXCursor cursor; |
||
5918 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
||
5919 | } CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo; |
||
5920 | |||
5921 | typedef struct { |
||
5922 | const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo *const *protocols; |
||
5923 | unsigned numProtocols; |
||
5924 | } CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo; |
||
5925 | |||
5926 | typedef struct { |
||
5927 | const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo; |
||
5928 | const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *superInfo; |
||
5929 | const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols; |
||
5930 | } CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo; |
||
5931 | |||
5932 | typedef struct { |
||
5933 | const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo; |
||
5934 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass; |
||
5935 | CXCursor classCursor; |
||
5936 | CXIdxLoc classLoc; |
||
5937 | const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols; |
||
5938 | } CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo; |
||
5939 | |||
5940 | typedef struct { |
||
5941 | const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo; |
||
5942 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *getter; |
||
5943 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *setter; |
||
5944 | } CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo; |
||
5945 | |||
5946 | typedef struct { |
||
5947 | const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo; |
||
5948 | const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *const *bases; |
||
5949 | unsigned numBases; |
||
5950 | } CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo; |
||
5951 | |||
5952 | /** |
||
5953 | * Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference. |
||
5954 | * |
||
5955 | * This may be deprecated in a future version as this duplicates |
||
5956 | * the \c CXSymbolRole_Implicit bit in \c CXSymbolRole. |
||
5957 | */ |
||
5958 | typedef enum { |
||
5959 | /** |
||
5960 | * The entity is referenced directly in user's code. |
||
5961 | */ |
||
5962 | CXIdxEntityRef_Direct = 1, |
||
5963 | /** |
||
5964 | * An implicit reference, e.g. a reference of an Objective-C method |
||
5965 | * via the dot syntax. |
||
5966 | */ |
||
5967 | CXIdxEntityRef_Implicit = 2 |
||
5968 | } CXIdxEntityRefKind; |
||
5969 | |||
5970 | /** |
||
5971 | * Roles that are attributed to symbol occurrences. |
||
5972 | * |
||
5973 | * Internal: this currently mirrors low 9 bits of clang::index::SymbolRole with |
||
5974 | * higher bits zeroed. These high bits may be exposed in the future. |
||
5975 | */ |
||
5976 | typedef enum { |
||
5977 | CXSymbolRole_None = 0, |
||
5978 | CXSymbolRole_Declaration = 1 << 0, |
||
5979 | CXSymbolRole_Definition = 1 << 1, |
||
5980 | CXSymbolRole_Reference = 1 << 2, |
||
5981 | CXSymbolRole_Read = 1 << 3, |
||
5982 | CXSymbolRole_Write = 1 << 4, |
||
5983 | CXSymbolRole_Call = 1 << 5, |
||
5984 | CXSymbolRole_Dynamic = 1 << 6, |
||
5985 | CXSymbolRole_AddressOf = 1 << 7, |
||
5986 | CXSymbolRole_Implicit = 1 << 8 |
||
5987 | } CXSymbolRole; |
||
5988 | |||
5989 | /** |
||
5990 | * Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference. |
||
5991 | */ |
||
5992 | typedef struct { |
||
5993 | CXIdxEntityRefKind kind; |
||
5994 | /** |
||
5995 | * Reference cursor. |
||
5996 | */ |
||
5997 | CXCursor cursor; |
||
5998 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
||
5999 | /** |
||
6000 | * The entity that gets referenced. |
||
6001 | */ |
||
6002 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *referencedEntity; |
||
6003 | /** |
||
6004 | * Immediate "parent" of the reference. For example: |
||
6005 | * |
||
6006 | * \code |
||
6007 | * Foo *var; |
||
6008 | * \endcode |
||
6009 | * |
||
6010 | * The parent of reference of type 'Foo' is the variable 'var'. |
||
6011 | * For references inside statement bodies of functions/methods, |
||
6012 | * the parentEntity will be the function/method. |
||
6013 | */ |
||
6014 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *parentEntity; |
||
6015 | /** |
||
6016 | * Lexical container context of the reference. |
||
6017 | */ |
||
6018 | const CXIdxContainerInfo *container; |
||
6019 | /** |
||
6020 | * Sets of symbol roles of the reference. |
||
6021 | */ |
||
6022 | CXSymbolRole role; |
||
6023 | } CXIdxEntityRefInfo; |
||
6024 | |||
6025 | /** |
||
6026 | * A group of callbacks used by #clang_indexSourceFile and |
||
6027 | * #clang_indexTranslationUnit. |
||
6028 | */ |
||
6029 | typedef struct { |
||
6030 | /** |
||
6031 | * Called periodically to check whether indexing should be aborted. |
||
6032 | * Should return 0 to continue, and non-zero to abort. |
||
6033 | */ |
||
6034 | int (*abortQuery)(CXClientData client_data, void *reserved); |
||
6035 | |||
6036 | /** |
||
6037 | * Called at the end of indexing; passes the complete diagnostic set. |
||
6038 | */ |
||
6039 | void (*diagnostic)(CXClientData client_data, CXDiagnosticSet, void *reserved); |
||
6040 | |||
6041 | CXIdxClientFile (*enteredMainFile)(CXClientData client_data, CXFile mainFile, |
||
6042 | void *reserved); |
||
6043 | |||
6044 | /** |
||
6045 | * Called when a file gets \#included/\#imported. |
||
6046 | */ |
||
6047 | CXIdxClientFile (*ppIncludedFile)(CXClientData client_data, |
||
6048 | const CXIdxIncludedFileInfo *); |
||
6049 | |||
6050 | /** |
||
6051 | * Called when a AST file (PCH or module) gets imported. |
||
6052 | * |
||
6053 | * AST files will not get indexed (there will not be callbacks to index all |
||
6054 | * the entities in an AST file). The recommended action is that, if the AST |
||
6055 | * file is not already indexed, to initiate a new indexing job specific to |
||
6056 | * the AST file. |
||
6057 | */ |
||
6058 | CXIdxClientASTFile (*importedASTFile)(CXClientData client_data, |
||
6059 | const CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo *); |
||
6060 | |||
6061 | /** |
||
6062 | * Called at the beginning of indexing a translation unit. |
||
6063 | */ |
||
6064 | CXIdxClientContainer (*startedTranslationUnit)(CXClientData client_data, |
||
6065 | void *reserved); |
||
6066 | |||
6067 | void (*indexDeclaration)(CXClientData client_data, const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
||
6068 | |||
6069 | /** |
||
6070 | * Called to index a reference of an entity. |
||
6071 | */ |
||
6072 | void (*indexEntityReference)(CXClientData client_data, |
||
6073 | const CXIdxEntityRefInfo *); |
||
6074 | |||
6075 | } IndexerCallbacks; |
||
6076 | |||
6077 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_index_isEntityObjCContainerKind(CXIdxEntityKind); |
||
6078 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo * |
||
6079 | clang_index_getObjCContainerDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
||
6080 | |||
6081 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo * |
||
6082 | clang_index_getObjCInterfaceDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
||
6083 | |||
6084 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
6085 | const CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo * |
||
6086 | clang_index_getObjCCategoryDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
||
6087 | |||
6088 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo * |
||
6089 | clang_index_getObjCProtocolRefListInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
||
6090 | |||
6091 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo * |
||
6092 | clang_index_getObjCPropertyDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
||
6093 | |||
6094 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo * |
||
6095 | clang_index_getIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo(const CXIdxAttrInfo *); |
||
6096 | |||
6097 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo * |
||
6098 | clang_index_getCXXClassDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
||
6099 | |||
6100 | /** |
||
6101 | * For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a |
||
6102 | * container. |
||
6103 | */ |
||
6104 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientContainer |
||
6105 | clang_index_getClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *); |
||
6106 | |||
6107 | /** |
||
6108 | * For setting a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a |
||
6109 | * container. |
||
6110 | */ |
||
6111 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_index_setClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *, |
||
6112 | CXIdxClientContainer); |
||
6113 | |||
6114 | /** |
||
6115 | * For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity. |
||
6116 | */ |
||
6117 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientEntity |
||
6118 | clang_index_getClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *); |
||
6119 | |||
6120 | /** |
||
6121 | * For setting a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity. |
||
6122 | */ |
||
6123 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_index_setClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *, |
||
6124 | CXIdxClientEntity); |
||
6125 | |||
6126 | /** |
||
6127 | * An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple |
||
6128 | * translation units. |
||
6129 | */ |
||
6130 | typedef void *CXIndexAction; |
||
6131 | |||
6132 | /** |
||
6133 | * An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple |
||
6134 | * translation units. |
||
6135 | * |
||
6136 | * \param CIdx The index object with which the index action will be associated. |
||
6137 | */ |
||
6138 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndexAction clang_IndexAction_create(CXIndex CIdx); |
||
6139 | |||
6140 | /** |
||
6141 | * Destroy the given index action. |
||
6142 | * |
||
6143 | * The index action must not be destroyed until all of the translation units |
||
6144 | * created within that index action have been destroyed. |
||
6145 | */ |
||
6146 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_IndexAction_dispose(CXIndexAction); |
||
6147 | |||
6148 | typedef enum { |
||
6149 | /** |
||
6150 | * Used to indicate that no special indexing options are needed. |
||
6151 | */ |
||
6152 | CXIndexOpt_None = 0x0, |
||
6153 | |||
6154 | /** |
||
6155 | * Used to indicate that IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference should |
||
6156 | * be invoked for only one reference of an entity per source file that does |
||
6157 | * not also include a declaration/definition of the entity. |
||
6158 | */ |
||
6159 | CXIndexOpt_SuppressRedundantRefs = 0x1, |
||
6160 | |||
6161 | /** |
||
6162 | * Function-local symbols should be indexed. If this is not set |
||
6163 | * function-local symbols will be ignored. |
||
6164 | */ |
||
6165 | CXIndexOpt_IndexFunctionLocalSymbols = 0x2, |
||
6166 | |||
6167 | /** |
||
6168 | * Implicit function/class template instantiations should be indexed. |
||
6169 | * If this is not set, implicit instantiations will be ignored. |
||
6170 | */ |
||
6171 | CXIndexOpt_IndexImplicitTemplateInstantiations = 0x4, |
||
6172 | |||
6173 | /** |
||
6174 | * Suppress all compiler warnings when parsing for indexing. |
||
6175 | */ |
||
6176 | CXIndexOpt_SuppressWarnings = 0x8, |
||
6177 | |||
6178 | /** |
||
6179 | * Skip a function/method body that was already parsed during an |
||
6180 | * indexing session associated with a \c CXIndexAction object. |
||
6181 | * Bodies in system headers are always skipped. |
||
6182 | */ |
||
6183 | CXIndexOpt_SkipParsedBodiesInSession = 0x10 |
||
6184 | |||
6185 | } CXIndexOptFlags; |
||
6186 | |||
6187 | /** |
||
6188 | * Index the given source file and the translation unit corresponding |
||
6189 | * to that file via callbacks implemented through #IndexerCallbacks. |
||
6190 | * |
||
6191 | * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will |
||
6192 | * be passed to the invoked callbacks. |
||
6193 | * |
||
6194 | * \param index_callbacks Pointer to indexing callbacks that the client |
||
6195 | * implements. |
||
6196 | * |
||
6197 | * \param index_callbacks_size Size of #IndexerCallbacks structure that gets |
||
6198 | * passed in index_callbacks. |
||
6199 | * |
||
6200 | * \param index_options A bitmask of options that affects how indexing is |
||
6201 | * performed. This should be a bitwise OR of the CXIndexOpt_XXX flags. |
||
6202 | * |
||
6203 | * \param[out] out_TU pointer to store a \c CXTranslationUnit that can be |
||
6204 | * reused after indexing is finished. Set to \c NULL if you do not require it. |
||
6205 | * |
||
6206 | * \returns 0 on success or if there were errors from which the compiler could |
||
6207 | * recover. If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns |
||
6208 | * a non-zero \c CXErrorCode. |
||
6209 | * |
||
6210 | * The rest of the parameters are the same as #clang_parseTranslationUnit. |
||
6211 | */ |
||
6212 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFile( |
||
6213 | CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks, |
||
6214 | unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options, |
||
6215 | const char *source_filename, const char *const *command_line_args, |
||
6216 | int num_command_line_args, struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, |
||
6217 | unsigned num_unsaved_files, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU, unsigned TU_options); |
||
6218 | |||
6219 | /** |
||
6220 | * Same as clang_indexSourceFile but requires a full command line |
||
6221 | * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard |
||
6222 | * library paths are relative to the binary. |
||
6223 | */ |
||
6224 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFileFullArgv( |
||
6225 | CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks, |
||
6226 | unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options, |
||
6227 | const char *source_filename, const char *const *command_line_args, |
||
6228 | int num_command_line_args, struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, |
||
6229 | unsigned num_unsaved_files, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU, unsigned TU_options); |
||
6230 | |||
6231 | /** |
||
6232 | * Index the given translation unit via callbacks implemented through |
||
6233 | * #IndexerCallbacks. |
||
6234 | * |
||
6235 | * The order of callback invocations is not guaranteed to be the same as |
||
6236 | * when indexing a source file. The high level order will be: |
||
6237 | * |
||
6238 | * -Preprocessor callbacks invocations |
||
6239 | * -Declaration/reference callbacks invocations |
||
6240 | * -Diagnostic callback invocations |
||
6241 | * |
||
6242 | * The parameters are the same as #clang_indexSourceFile. |
||
6243 | * |
||
6244 | * \returns If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns |
||
6245 | * non-zero, otherwise returns 0. |
||
6246 | */ |
||
6247 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexTranslationUnit( |
||
6248 | CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks, |
||
6249 | unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options, CXTranslationUnit); |
||
6250 | |||
6251 | /** |
||
6252 | * Retrieve the CXIdxFile, file, line, column, and offset represented by |
||
6253 | * the given CXIdxLoc. |
||
6254 | * |
||
6255 | * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the |
||
6256 | * location of the macro expansion and if it refers into a macro argument |
||
6257 | * retrieves the location of the argument. |
||
6258 | */ |
||
6259 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_indexLoc_getFileLocation(CXIdxLoc loc, |
||
6260 | CXIdxClientFile *indexFile, |
||
6261 | CXFile *file, unsigned *line, |
||
6262 | unsigned *column, |
||
6263 | unsigned *offset); |
||
6264 | |||
6265 | /** |
||
6266 | * Retrieve the CXSourceLocation represented by the given CXIdxLoc. |
||
6267 | */ |
||
6268 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
6269 | CXSourceLocation clang_indexLoc_getCXSourceLocation(CXIdxLoc loc); |
||
6270 | |||
6271 | /** |
||
6272 | * Visitor invoked for each field found by a traversal. |
||
6273 | * |
||
6274 | * This visitor function will be invoked for each field found by |
||
6275 | * \c clang_Type_visitFields. Its first argument is the cursor being |
||
6276 | * visited, its second argument is the client data provided to |
||
6277 | * \c clang_Type_visitFields. |
||
6278 | * |
||
6279 | * The visitor should return one of the \c CXVisitorResult values |
||
6280 | * to direct \c clang_Type_visitFields. |
||
6281 | */ |
||
6282 | typedef enum CXVisitorResult (*CXFieldVisitor)(CXCursor C, |
||
6283 | CXClientData client_data); |
||
6284 | |||
6285 | /** |
||
6286 | * Visit the fields of a particular type. |
||
6287 | * |
||
6288 | * This function visits all the direct fields of the given cursor, |
||
6289 | * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each |
||
6290 | * visited field. The traversal may be ended prematurely, if |
||
6291 | * the visitor returns \c CXFieldVisit_Break. |
||
6292 | * |
||
6293 | * \param T the record type whose field may be visited. |
||
6294 | * |
||
6295 | * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each |
||
6296 | * field of \p T. |
||
6297 | * |
||
6298 | * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will |
||
6299 | * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked. |
||
6300 | * |
||
6301 | * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated |
||
6302 | * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXFieldVisit_Break. |
||
6303 | */ |
||
6304 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_visitFields(CXType T, CXFieldVisitor visitor, |
||
6305 | CXClientData client_data); |
||
6306 | |||
6307 | /** |
||
6308 | * @} |
||
6309 | */ |
||
6310 | |||
6311 | /** |
||
6312 | * @} |
||
6313 | */ |
||
6314 | |||
6315 | LLVM_CLANG_C_EXTERN_C_END |
||
6316 | |||
6317 | #endif |